2013 gmc savana owner manual m€¦ · gmc savana owner manual - 2013 - 2nd edition - 9/25/12 black...

Black plate (1,1)GMC Savana Owner Manual - 2013 - 2nd Edition - 9/25/12

2013 GMC Savana Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-38

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-22Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-32Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-37Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-57


2013 GMC Savana Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . 11-12Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, and SAVANAare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for GMCwherever it appears in this manual.

If the vehicle has the Duramax®

Diesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for additional andspecific information on this engine.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20987871 B Second Printing ©2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see the owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

J : Brake System WarningLight

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

i : Top Tether Anchors for ChildRestraints


Introduction v

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . 1-8Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-8Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-11Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-15Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-17Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Performance and MaintenanceStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-18Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-19Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-19Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-19Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8‑7.

2. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑24.

3. Turn and Lane-Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

4. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4 (Out of View).

5. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.

6. Shift Lever. See Starting theEngine on page 9‑16.

Manual Mode on page 9‑28 (IfEquipped).

7. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

8. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

9. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

10. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

Dome Lamp Override. SeeDome Lamps on page 6‑5.

11. Cruise Control on page 9‑34 (IfEquipped).

Fast Idle System (If Equipped).See the Duramax dieselsupplement.

12. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2 (If Equipped).

13. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑17.

14. Horn on page 5‑3.

15. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 (If Equipped).

16. Tow/Haul Mode Button. See“Tow/Haul Mode” under TowingEquipment on page 9‑54.

17. Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

18. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑32 (If Equipped).

19. Passenger Airbag On-OffSwitch (If Equipped). SeeAirbag On-Off Switch onpage 3‑23.

20. Front Storage on page 4‑1 (IfEquipped).

21. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑16 (IfEquipped).

OnStar® System Button (IfEquipped). See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

22. Rear Heating System onpage 8‑4 (If Equipped).

23. USB Port (If Equipped). SeeAuxiliary Devices onpage 7‑16.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemIf equipped, the RKE transmitter isused to remotely lock and unlockthe doors from up to 60 m (195 ft)away from the vehicle.

RKE Transmitter with RemoteStart Shown

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑38.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within five secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

j : Press to unlock only the cargodoors.

L : Press and release to locatethe vehicle. PressL and hold formore than two seconds to sound thepanic alarm. PressL again tocancel the panic alarm.

See Keys on page 2‑1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑2.

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ forfour seconds or until the turnsignal lamps flash.


In Brief 1-5

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and thenback off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑4.

Door Locks

Manual Door Locks

Lock and unlock the door from theoutside using the key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if available. From the inside, slidethe manual lever on the door upor down.

See Door Locks on page 2‑6.

Power Door Locks

On vehicles with power door locks,the switches are located on thedoors.

T : Press to lock and unlock thedoors.

See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.


1-6 In Brief

Windows

Manual Windows

Operate the manual windows byturning the hand crank on each doorto raise or lower the side doorwindows.

See Manual Windows on page 2‑15.

Power Windows

If the vehicle has power windows,the controls are on the front doors.The driver door also has a control tooperate the front passenger window.

Press or pull up on the switch tolower or raise the window.

Express-Down

The driver window switch also hasan express-down feature that allowsthe window to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press fully andrelease the window switch markedAUTO to activate the express-downmode. This mode can be canceledat any time by pulling up on theswitch. To open the window partway, lightly tap the switch until thewindow is at the desired position.

See Power Windows on page 2‑15.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑2.


In Brief 1-7

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat, if available,use the controls on the front ofthe seat:. Adjust the seat by moving the

center knob up, down, right,or left.

. Raise and lower the front or rearof the seat cushion by movingthe right or left lever up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑2.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the inboard sideof the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑3.

Safety Belts


1-8 In Brief

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑8.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑9.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑10.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑40.

Airbag On-Off SwitchIf the instrument panel has one ofthe switches pictured in thefollowing illustrations, the vehiclehas an airbag on-off switch that youcan use to manually turn on or offthe right front passenger airbag.

United States

Canada and Mexico

To operate the airbag on‐off switch,use the vehicle key.

See Airbag On-Off Switch onpage 3‑23 for important information.

Passenger SensingSystemThe passenger sensing system,if equipped, will turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. The driver airbagand roof‐rail airbags, if equipped,are not affected by this.

If the vehicle has a passengersensing system, the passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the instrument panel when thevehicle is started.


In Brief 1-9

United States

Canada and Mexico

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑26 for important information.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Vehicles with outside manualmirrors can be adjusted by movingthe mirror up and down or left toright so you can see a little of theside of the vehicle, and have a clearview of objects behind you.

Select each mirror by turning theknob clockwise for the passengerside mirror or counterclockwise forthe driver side mirror. Adjust themirror angle by moving the knob inthe desired direction.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

Vehicles with towing mirrors can beadjusted manually for a clear viewof the objects behind you.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn it to the original position.

Interior Mirror

To adjust the inside rearview mirror,hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.


1-10 In Brief

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑14.

Steering WheelAdjustment

For vehicles with a tilt steeringwheel, the lever is located on theleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever to move thesteering wheel up or down into acomfortable position.

2. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

See Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The instrument panel brightnessknob extends whenD is pressed.To manually turn on the domelamps, pressD then turn the knobclockwise to the farthest position. Inthis position, the dome lampsremain on whether a door is openedor closed.

E DOME OFF: This button islocated above the instrument panelbrightness knob.


In Brief 1-11

Press the button in and the domelamps remain off when a door isopened. Press the button again sothat the dome lamps come on whena door is opened.

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with reading lamps,press the button located next toeach lamp to turn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.

For more information on interiorlighting, see:. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑5.. Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑6.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

O : Briefly turn the control to thisposition to turn the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) off or back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works forvehicles that are shifted into theP (Park) position.

AUTO: Automatically turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,and license plate lamps.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,and license plate lamps.

2 : Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, taillamps, instrumentpanel lights, and license platelamps.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2. Automatic Headlamp System on

page 6‑3

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The lever is located on the left sideof the steering column.


1-12 In Brief

8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.

6 : Use to adjust the delay timebetween wipes. Turn the band up ordown for more frequent wipes orless frequent wipes.

d : Slow wipes.

a : Fast wipes.

9 : Use to turn the wipers off.

L : Push the paddle on top of themultifunction lever to spray washerfluid on the windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

Climate ControlsThe vehicle's heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled with thesesystems.

Vehicles without Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control

2. Temperature Control

3. Air Delivery Mode Control


In Brief 1-13

Vehicles with Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control



4. Rear Window Defogger

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1. See Rear Heating Systemon page 8‑4 (If Equipped) or RearClimate Control System on page 8‑5(If Equipped).

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

The vehicle may have a RangeSelection Mode. The RangeSelection Mode helps control the

vehicle's transmission and vehiclespeed while driving downhill ortowing a trailer by letting you selecta desired range of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the +/− buttons on theshift lever, to select the desiredrange of gears for current drivingconditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selected,a number displays in the DIC next tothe M indicating the current gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑29.

While using Range Selection Mode,Cruise Control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used. See ManualMode on page 9‑28.


1-14 In Brief

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD (MP3)

O : Press to turn the system onand off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM1, FM2, AM, and SiriusXM®.

f : Select radio stations.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Seek or scanstations.

4 : Press to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition isoff, press this button to display thetime. Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS station or MP3 song.A choice of additional informationsuch as Channel, Song, Artist, andCAT (category) can display.Continue pressing to highlight thedesired tab, or press the softkeylocated under any one of the tabsand the information about that tabdisplays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeInfotainment on page 7‑1.

Storing a Favorite Station

Depending on which radio thevehicle has, radio stations arestored as either favorites or presets.


In Brief 1-15

For vehicles with a FAV button, amaximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theradio FAV button. Press FAV to gothrough up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stationsavailable per page. Each page offavorites can contain anycombination of AM and FM stations.

If the radio does not have a FAVbutton, up to 18 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM), can beprogrammed on the six numberedbuttons.

For more information on storing afavorite station, see Operation onpage 7‑5.

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theRadio with CD (MP3):

1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, and YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year) display.

2. Press the softkey located belowany one of the tabs that youwant to change.

3. Increase or decrease the time ordate, depending on the radio, bypressing the © SEEK or ¨ SEEK

buttons,s REV or\ FWD

buttons, or by turning fclockwise or counterclockwise.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for your specific audiosystem, see Clock on page 5‑6.

Satellite RadioSiriusXM® is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

For more information, refer to:. www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-209-0079 (Canada)

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑8.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput on the radio faceplate and aUSB port on the instrument panel.External devices such as an iPod®,laptop computer, MP3 player, CDchanger, or USB storage device canbe connected to the auxiliary portusing a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input cableor the USB port depending on theaudio system.

See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack"and "Using the USB Port" inAuxiliary Devices on page 7‑16.


1-16 In Brief

Bluetooth®

For vehicles with a Bluetoothsystem, it allows users with aBluetooth-enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,see www.gm.com/bluetooth andBluetooth on page 7‑21.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w : Press to go to the next favoriteradio station, track on a CD,or folder on an iPod® or USBdevice.

c /x : Press to go to theprevious favorite radio station, trackon a CD, or folder on an iPod® orUSB device. Also press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth systems,if equipped.

+ e : Press to increase volume.

− e : Press to decrease volume.

SRCE: Press to switch betweenthe radio and CD, and for equippedvehicles, the front auxiliary.

¨ : Press to seek the next radiostation, the next track while sourcedto the CD, or to select tracks andfolders on an iPod® or USB device.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.


In Brief 1-17

Cruise Control

For vehicles with cruise control, usethe following buttons:

I : Turns the system on or off.

+RES: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previously setspeed, or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET−: Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or press andhold to decelerate.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑34.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separatenavigation manual that includesinformation on the radio, audioplayers, and navigation system.

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of points ofinterest (POIs), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

See the navigation manual for moreinformation.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the RVC displays a viewof the area behind the vehicle whenthe vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse). The display will appearon either the inside rearview mirroror navigation screen, if equipped.

To clean the camera lens, locatedabove the license plate, rinse it withwater and wipe it with a soft cloth.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9‑38.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, this system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audiblebeeps to provide distance andsystem information.


1-18 In Brief

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑37.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets on theinstrument panel.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

Performance andMaintenance

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle may have a tractioncontrol system that limits wheel spinand the StabiliTrak system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.Both systems turn on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.

. To turn off traction control, pressand release the StabiliTrakbutton g. The appropriate DICmessage will display. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑34.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and holdthe StabiliTrak button g until the

StabiliTrak Off lightYilluminates and the appropriateDIC messages display. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑34.

. Press and release theStabiliTrak button again to turnon both systems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑32.


In Brief 1-19

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that the

tire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑53.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter. The oil life systemshould be reset to 100% onlyfollowing an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑8.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85%Ethanol) on page 9‑44. For all othervehicles, use only the unleadedgasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑42.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.


1-20 In Brief

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-888-881-3302

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new GMC, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑5.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsSide Door(60/40 Swing-Out) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . 2-11

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-14

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Swing-Out Windows . . . . . . . . . 2-16Enhanced TechnologyGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationIf equipped, the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter functionswork up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.



RKE Transmitter with RemoteStart Shown

Q (Lock): Press once to lock alldoors. If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred.

The horn may chirp when Q ispressed again within five seconds.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38 for additional information.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door. If K is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remainingdoors unlock.

The interior lamps come on andstay on for 20 seconds or until theignition is turned on. If enabledthrough the DIC, the parking lampsflash twice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑38 foradditional information.

j (Cargo Door): Press to unlockonly the cargo doors.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press Qand then press and hold/ withinfive seconds to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle using the RKEtransmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑4 for additionalinformation.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved to ON/RUN orL is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolen



transmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up tofour transmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. See“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTEKEY” under Key and LockMessages on page 5‑33 foradditional information.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.. Carefully insert the tool into

the notch located along theparting line of thetransmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestart feature. This feature allows youto start the engine from outside thevehicle. It may also start thevehicle's heating or air conditioningsystems. See Climate ControlSystems on page 8‑1 for additionalinformation.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.



The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 foradditional information.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if you have remote start.

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q on thetransmitter.

3. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flash.If you cannot see the vehicle'slamps, press and hold forfour seconds.

When the engine starts, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on while the engine isrunning. The doors will be

locked. The airbag readinesslight will be on during a remotestart. It should turn off when theignition is turned to ON/RUN.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14 for more information.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. Repeat the stepsfor a 10-minute time extension.Remote start can be extendedonly once.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

The maximum number of remotestarts between ignition cycles withthe key is two.

If the remote start procedure is usedagain before the first 10 minute timeframe has ended, the first10 minutes will immediately expireand the second 10 minute timeframe will start.

After the engine has been remotestarted two times, the ignition switchmust be turned to ON/RUN and then

back to LOCK/OFF using the keybefore the remote start procedurecan be used again.

To cancel a remote start do any ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition.. The hood is open.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. There is an emission control

system malfunction. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑17.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.



. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts havealready been provided.

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock the door from the inside,slide the manual lever on the doordown. To unlock the door, slide themanual lever up.

From the outside, use the key.

If the vehicle is equipped withkeyless entry. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑2.



Power Door Locks

T : Press to lock and unlock thedoors.

When a door is locked, the insidedoor handle will not work.

Cargo Door RelockingIf the cargo door is open when thelock button is pressed on the dooror the RKE transmitter, all doors willlock except the cargo door. The

cargo door will lock immediatelywhen it is closed or when thedelayed locking feature functions.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door open,the doors will lock five seconds afterthe last door is closed. The hornchirps to signal that the delayedlocking feature is in use.

Pressinge or Q on the RKEtransmitter will override the delayedlocking feature and immediately lockall the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmedusing the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “Delay DoorLock” in Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle may have an automaticlock/unlock feature. This feature canbe programmed using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a dooris open.

If the power lock switch is pressedwhen either the driver, passenger,or rear door is open, all the doorswill lock and then the driver door willunlock. This feature does notinclude the side cargo door.

If the vehicle has an ambulancepackage, this feature is disabled.



Safety LocksSecurity locks are located on thefront portion of the 60/40 sideswing-out door or the sidesliding door.

60/40 Swing-Out SideDoor—Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

For the 60/40 side swing-out door,move the button to the right for thedriver side door or to the left for thepassenger side door to engage thesecurity feature.

Move the button to the left for thedriver side door or to the right forthe passenger side door to returnthe door locks to normal operation.

Side Sliding Door

For the side sliding door, move thebutton up to engage the securityfeature. Move the button down toreturn the door locks to normaloperation.

Doors

Side Door(60/40 Swing-Out)

To open the front portion of a60/40 door from the outside, pull outon the handle and open the door.



To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the inside, pull thehandle toward you and push thedoor open.

To open the rear portion of a60/40 door from the outside, pull thehandle on the side of the rear doorand pull the door toward you.

To close the 60/40 side doors, closethe rear door first. Then close thefront door. Check to make sure thatboth doors are completely closed.

The swing-out doors have a checkstrap assembly in the door frame tokeep the door from opening beyond90 degrees.

To open the door beyond90 degrees, close the door partially,pull the check strap toward you and

then open the door. When the dooris closed, the check strap willautomatically re-engage.

Sliding Door

To open the sliding side door fromthe outside, pull the handle towardthe rear of the vehicle and slide thedoor open.

To close the sliding side door fromthe outside, use the handle to slidethe door toward the front of thevehicle.



When the door is closed, it will beflush with the side of the body.

To open the sliding side door fromthe inside, pull the handle towardthe rear of the vehicle. Then, slidethe door toward the rear of thevehicle.

To close the sliding side door fromthe inside, grasp the handle andslide the door toward the front of thevehicle.

Make sure the door is completelyclosed before driving away.

Rear Doors

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To open the rear doors from theoutside, pull the handle toward youto open the passenger side reardoor first.



To open the driver side rear door,pull the latch release at the insideedge of the door.

To close the rear doors, close thedriver side rear door first. Thenclose the passenger side rear door.Check to make sure both doors arecompletely closed.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle is equipped with thePASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System)theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passive theftdeterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light will come on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses that someone is using thewrong key, it shuts down thevehicle's starter and fuel systems.The starter will not work and fuel willstop being delivered to the engine.Anyone using a trial-and-errormethod to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the highnumber of electrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity message comes on, thekey may have a damagedtransponder. Turn the ignition offand try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. If the enginestill does not start with the other key,the vehicle needs service. If thevehicle does start, the first key maybe faulty. See your dealer or a



locksmith who can service thePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedfor the vehicle. This procedure is forlearning additional keys only. If allthe currently programmed keys arelost or do not operate, you must seeyour dealer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key III+ to have keysmade and programmed to thesystem.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank that is cut exactly asthe ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new key:

1. Verify the new key has 1stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key into the ignitionlock cylinder and start theengine. If the engine will notstart, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to ON/RUN within10 seconds of removing theprevious key.

The security message will turnoff once the key has beenprogrammed. It may not beapparent that the securitymessage went on due to howquickly the key is programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If you lose or damage aPASS-Key III+ key, see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Manual MirrorsAdjust the mirrors by pressing themirror up and down and left andright.

The mirrors can be manually foldedin or out.

On the lower portion of each mirroris an auxiliary convex mirror.A convex mirror's surface is curvedso you can see more from the driverseat. The auxiliary convex mirrorscan be adjusted manually bypressing the mirror.

Trailer-Tow Mirrors

Vehicles with towing mirrors can beadjusted manually for a clear viewof the objects behind you.

On the lower portion of each mirrorthere is an auxiliary convex mirrorthat can be adjusted manually toprovide an extended field of view.

The mirrors can be manually foldedin or out.

Power Mirrors

Select each mirror by turning theknob clockwise for the passengerside mirror or counterclockwise forthe driver side mirror. The centerposition is neutral.



Then, adjust the mirror angle bymoving the knob in the desireddirection. The auxiliary convexmirrors can only be adjustedmanually.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Defogger): Press to heatthe mirrors.

An indicator light in the button lightswhen the outside heated mirrors areactivated.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 for more information.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorTo adjust the inside rearview mirror,hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind.

Cargo vans without rear door glassmay not have an inside rearviewmirror.

The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera (RVC). See Rear VisionCamera (RVC) on page 9‑38.

Windows

{ WARNING

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.



Manual WindowsOperate the manual windows byturning the hand crank on each doorto raise or lower the side doorwindows.

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. See Keys on page 2‑1.

If the vehicle has power windows,the controls are on each of the frontdoors.

The driver door has a switch for thepassenger window also. The powerwindows will work when the ignitionhas been turned to ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑19.

Press the switch to lower thewindow.

Pull up on the front edge of theswitch to raise the window.

Express-Down

The driver window switch also hasan express-down feature that allowsthe window to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press fully andrelease the window switch markedAUTO to activate the express-downmode. This mode can be canceledat any time by pulling up on theswitch. To open the window partway, lightly tap the switch until thewindow is at the desired position.



Swing-Out Windows

Side Swing-Out Window

To open the side door swing-outwindow, pull up on the latch at theedge of the window. Swing thewindow out and push down on thelatch to lock the window into place.

To close the window, pull the latchtoward you and push down on thelatch to lock it.

Rear Swing‐Out Windows

The vehicle also has rear swing‐outwindows. The rear swing-outwindows work the same way as theside swing‐out window, but the latchis located at the bottom edge of thewindow.

Enhanced TechnologyGlassThe vehicle may be equipped withEnhanced Technology Glass (ETG).ETG is part of the overall occupantprotection system on passengervans. ETG may help to keeppassengers sitting next to thesefixed windows from being ejectedthrough the glass in some, but not inall crashes. Even with this glass,safety belts must still be worn at alltimes. For passenger vans, use onlyETG glass approved for the vehiclefor replacement when damaged.



The following table shows laminated glass location, based on vehicle modeland options.

Vehicle Configuration ETG Locations

Eight‐Seat Passenger Vans Sliding door forward window

12‐ and 15‐Seat Passenger Vans Sliding door forward window andrear-most side windows

Long Wheelbase Cargo Vans Rear-most side windows

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down thesun visors. You can also swing themto the side.

Visor Vanity Mirror

The vehicle may have visor vanitymirrors, with or without lamps. Liftthe mirror cover to turn the lampson, if equipped.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-2Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-14Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-18When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-23Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-31

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-32Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-37Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-39Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat with PassengerSensing System) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat with Airbag On/Off Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsOn vehicles with factory installedseats, the front seats have built-inhead restraints that are notadjustable in the outboard seatingpositions.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar under the front edgeof the seat cushion to unlockthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

Power Seat Adjustment



To adjust a power seat, if available,use the controls on the front ofthe seat:. Move the center knob to the

right or left to move the seatforward or rearward.

. Move the center knob up ordown to raise or lower the seat.

. Move the right or left lever up ordown to raise or lower the frontor rear of the seat cushion.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the inboard sideof the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly. Do not have a seatback reclined if

the vehicle is moving.

Rear SeatsRemoving the Rear Seat

Disconnect the mini-latch plates forthe lap‐shoulder belts on the benchseat to be removed.

1. To do this, press the tip of a keyinto the release hole of thesafety belt buckle while pullingup on the safety belt.



2. Locate the pins.

On a three-passenger seat thereare two pins on the inboard sidesof the rear seats.

Three-Passenger Seat Shown

The left side pin has a gray capwith a black “L” marked on it.


The right side pin has ablack cap with a white “R”marked on it.

On a four-passenger seat, eachhalf of the seat has a set of pins.The left side has a setmarked “L,” and the right sidehas a set marked “R”.

If the vehicle has floor mats, thepins are under a flap that hasbeen cut into the mat.

3. Pull the pin handle up todisengage the pin from theretaining clip, and then pull thepin out.

4. Repeat this procedure for theother pins.

5. Pull the seat rearward about5 cm (2 in), and then lift the seatfrom the floor rails.

6. Remove the seat from thevehicle.



7. For the second- and third-rowseats, stow the safety belt latchby attaching the clip on thesafety belt latch to the trim justinside the side door.

For the last row of seats, stowthe safety belt latch plate on theclip at the window trim. Roll themini-latch into the safety beltwebbing and then hook thesafety belt latch plate on the clip.

Reinstalling the Rear Seats

{ WARNING

A seat that is not locked intoplace properly can move aroundin a collision or sudden stop.People in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure to lock the seatinto place properly wheninstalling it.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

1. Position the seat into the openslots in both rails. Push the seatforward in the rail, hooking bothseat bases onto the pins insideof the rails.

2. Locate the hole in the rail toinstall the locking pins at the rearof the seat base. If the vehiclehas floor mats, pull the flap thathas been cut into the mat.

3. Insert the locking pins into theseat base and push the seat toline up the pins with the base.

On a three-passenger seat, thepin with the black capmarked “R” must be installed onthe right side and the pin withthe gray cap marked “L” on theleft side.

On a four-passenger seat, thepins marked “R” must beinstalled on the half of the seaton the right side. The pinsmarked “L” must be installed onthe half of the seat on theleft side.




4. Push the pin(s) marked “R” downuntil they are in theretaining clip.


5. Push the pin(s) marked “L” downuntil they are in theretaining clip.

6. If the vehicle has a floor mat, putthe flap back to its originalposition.

7. Repeat this procedure for theother seat base.

8. Connect the mini-latch plates forthe lap-shoulder belts byinserting the latch plates into themini-buckles attached at theoutboard positions of the benchseat. Do not twist the belts.

9. Check that all locking pins arelocked into place beforeoperating the vehicle.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑14.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the



safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑33 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑35.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.



. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt. If you areusing a rear seating position with a

detachable safety belt and thesafety belt is not attached, see“Reinstalling the Rear Seats” underRear Seats on page 3‑4 forinstructions on reconnecting thesafety belt to the mini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraint

locking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑14.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Safety Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Safety Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a safety belt heightadjuster for the driver and right frontpassenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑9.



To move it down, pull on the centeradjuster control labeled PULL. Youcan move the height adjuster up justby pushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing in to make sure ithas locked into position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) of the vehicle is below3 855 kg (8,500 lb) then the vehiclehas safety belt pretensioners for thefront outboard occupants. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10 tolocate the certification label whichcontains the GVWR.

Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if the

vehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners are activated in acrash, the pretensioners andpossibly other parts of the safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3‑15.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer.The guides may provide addedsafety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seatsand for some adults. When installedand properly adjusted, the comfortguide positions the shoulder beltaway from the neck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Locate the guide in a pocket onthe side of the seatback.



2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.



To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide into its storage pocket onthe side of the seatback.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Never

use it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑14.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑15.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

crash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbag:. A frontal airbag for the driver.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A roof-rail airbag for the driver

(cargo van).. A roof-rail airbag for the right

front passenger position(cargo or passenger vanequipped with a sliding door).

If you have a passenger vanwith a right front passengerroof-rail airbag and a slidingdoor, you will also have aseparate roof-rail airbag for thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passengerand the third row outboardpassenger position.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driver,the passenger seated directlybehind the driver, and the thirdrow outboard passenger position(passenger van equipped with asliding or hinged door).

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger, the passengerseated directly behind the rightfront passenger, and thethird row outboard passengerposition (passenger vanequipped with a hinged door).

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑19.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withroof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑33 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑35.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14 formore information.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

If the vehicle has one, the right frontpassenger airbag is in theinstrument panel on thepassenger side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If the vehicle is a cargo orpassenger van with a sliding doorand it has a roof-rail airbag for thedriver and right front passengerposition, the roof-rail airbags are inthe ceiling above the side window.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If the vehicle has roof-rail airbagsfor the driver, right front passenger,passengers behind the driver andright front passenger, and the thirdrow outboard passengers, theroof-rail airbags are in the ceilingabove the side windows. On thedriver side of the vehicle, there isone single roof-rail airbag for eithervehicles with a hinged door or asliding door.

For passenger vans with a slidingdoor, on the passenger side of thevehicle, you will have a separateroof-rail airbag for the passengerseated directly behind the right frontpassenger and the third rowoutboard passenger position.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie down

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

through any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver or rightfront passenger head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast the vehicle is traveling.



It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

Single Stage vs. Dual StageAirbags

Depending on the weight of thevehicle, you will have either “SingleStage Airbags” or “Dual StageAirbags.” Vehicles that have apassenger sensing system alsohave dual stage airbags. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑16 or Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑26.

If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) of the vehicle is 3 855 kg(8,500 lb) or above, the vehicle mayhave single stage airbags. If theGVWR is below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb)then the vehicle may have dualstage airbags. You can find theGVWR on the certification label onthe rear edge of the driver door. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10for more information.

Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle may or may not haveroof-rail airbags. See Airbag Systemon page 3‑16. Roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes. In addition,these roof-rail airbags are intendedto inflate during a rollover. Roof-railairbags will inflate if the crashseverity is above the system'sdesigned threshold level. Thethreshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, or rear impacts. All roof-railairbags will deploy when either sideof the vehicle is struck.



In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For roof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.

In a rollover event, roof‐rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows for the first,second, and third rows (if equipped).See Where Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑18 for more information.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stopping theoccupant more gradually. Roof-rail

airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst, second, and third rows,if equipped. The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed tohelp reduce the risk of full or partialejection in rollover events, althoughno system can prevent all suchejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. SeeWhen Should an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑19 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.



What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags inflate, theyquickly deflate, so quickly that somepeople may not even realize anairbag inflated. Roof-rail airbagsmay still be at least partially inflatedfor some time after they deploy.Some components of the airbagmodule may be hot for severalminutes. For location of the airbagmodules, see What Makes anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑21.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors(if equipped with power door locks),turn on the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, and

turn off the interior lamps and thehazard warning flashers by usingthe controls for those features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.



. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, the airbagsystem will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash.A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly otherparts. The service manual forthe vehicle covers the need toreplace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording on page 13‑13.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Airbag On-Off SwitchIf the instrument panel has one ofthe switches pictured in thefollowing illustrations, the vehiclehas an airbag on-off switch that youcan use to manually turn on or offthe right front passenger airbag.

United States

Canada and Mexico

If the vehicle does not have anairbag on-off switch, it may have apassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑26.



This switch should only be turned tothe off position if the person in theright front passenger position is amember of a passenger risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than1 year old) must ride in the frontseat because:. My vehicle has no rear seat;. My vehicle has a rear seat too

small to accommodate arear-facing infant seat; or

. The infant has a medicalcondition which, according to theinfant's physician, makes itnecessary for the infant to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A childage 1 to 12 must ride in the frontseat because:. My vehicle has no rear seat;. Although children ages 1 to 12

ride in the rear seat(s) wheneverpossible, children ages 1 to 12sometimes must ride in the frontbecause no space is available inthe rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or

. The child has a medicalcondition which, according to thechild's physician, makes itnecessary for the child to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.

Medical Condition. A passengerhas a medical condition which,according to his or her physician:. Causes the passenger airbag to

pose a special risk for thepassenger; and

. Makes the potential harm fromthe passenger airbag in a crashgreater than the potential harmfrom turning off the airbag andallowing the passenger, even ifbelted, to hit the instrumentpanel or windshield in a crash.

{ WARNING

If the right front passenger airbagis turned off for a person who isnot in a risk group identified bythe national government, thatperson will not have the extraprotection of an airbag. In acrash, the airbag will not be ableto inflate and help protect theperson sitting there. Do not turnoff the passenger airbag unlessthe person sitting there is in a riskgroup.



United States

Canada and Mexico

To turn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag, insert the ignition keyinto the switch, push in, and movethe switch to the off position.

The airbag off light will come on tolet you know the right frontpassenger airbag is off. The airbagoff light will stay on to remind youthat the airbag is off. See AirbagOn-Off Light on page 5‑15. The rightfront passenger airbag will remainoff until you turn it back on again.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the right frontpassenger airbag could inflateeven though the airbag on-offswitch is turned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

United States



Canada and Mexico

To turn the right front passengerairbag on again, insert the ignitionkey into the switch, push in, andmove the switch to the on position.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is now enabled, andmay inflate. See Airbag On-Off Lighton page 5‑15 for more information.

Passenger SensingSystemIf the instrument panel has one ofthe indicators pictured in thefollowing illustrations, the vehiclehas a passenger sensing systemunless there is an airbag off switchlocated on the instrument panel.If there is an airbag off switch, thevehicle does not have a passengersensing system. See Airbag On-OffSwitch on page 3‑23 for moreinformation.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted.

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. If you areusing remote start, if equipped, tostart the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON or theword OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off, will be visible.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑16.

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag and



roof-rail airbags, if equipped, are notpart of the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,Children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.



. The system determines that aninfant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑16.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehiclewho has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.



4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3‑47 or SecuringChild Restraints (Front Seat withPassenger Sensing System) onpage 3‑49 or Securing ChildRestraints (Front Seat withAirbag On/Off Switch) onpage 3‑52.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle, and check with yourdealer.

If no rear seat is available, donot install a child restraint in thisvehicle.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.



This allows the system to detect thatperson and then enable the rightfront passenger frontal airbag.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on

page 3‑31 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Your

dealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑11.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, rolloversensor module, or airbag wiringcan affect the operation of theairbag system.

In addition, the vehicle may havea passenger sensing system forthe right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passenger

seat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑26.

If you have any questions aboutthis, you should contactCustomer Assistance before youmodify the vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in

Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑62 for additionalimportant information.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.



In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑18. See your dealer forservice.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑10. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑10.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

{ WARNING

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

arms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facing

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

child restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, there

are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.



Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑40.

Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety



Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

If a child restraint is secured in theright front passenger seat, and thereis a switch on the instrument panelto manually turn off the right frontpassenger airbag. See AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3‑23 andSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3‑47 or SecuringChild Restraints (Front Seat withPassenger Sensing System) onpage 3‑49 or Securing ChildRestraints (Front Seat with AirbagOn/Off Switch) on page 3‑52 formore information, includingimportant safety information.


{ WARNING


Even if the passenger sensingsystem or airbag switch hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)


When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be able

to access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.


Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. This system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether strap and anchor.



In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments.The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.



The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second, Third, and Fourth Rowwith Three-Passenger Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

See the information following forinstalling a child restraint with a toptether in the second, third, andfourth row center positions.

Do not install three child restraints inthe same row at the same time andnever install two top tethers usingthe same top tether anchor.

Front Passenger Position

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

The second, third, and fourth rowwith three-passenger seats haveexposed metal lower anchorslocated in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.



Second, Third, and Fourth Rowwith Three-PassengerSeat—Passenger Van

There are two top tether anchors inthe second-, third-, and fourth-rowthree-passenger seats. To install achild restraint in the rear driver-sideseating positions, use anchorpoint (1). To install a child restraintin the rear passenger-side seatingpositions, use anchor point (2).To install a child restraint in the rearcenter seating positions, use anchorpoint (2). Never install two toptethers using the same top tetheranchor.

If the vehicle is equipped with afour-passenger fourth- or fifth-rowseat, it does not have upper orlower anchors. If a child restraint isplaced in the four-passenger fourthor fifth-row seat, it must be securedusing the vehicle safety belts. See“Rear Seat Position” under SecuringChild Restraints (Rear Seat) onpage 3‑47 or Securing ChildRestraints (Front Seat withPassenger Sensing System) onpage 3‑49 or Securing ChildRestraints (Front Seat with AirbagOn/Off Switch) on page 3‑52.

Front Passenger Position

There is a top tether anchor for thefront passenger position with a frontpassenger seat. The anchor islocated at the rear of the seatcushion on the right frontpassenger seat.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑39 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑39.

This system is designed to makethe installation of child restraintseasier. When using lower anchors,



do not use the vehicle's safety belts.Instead, use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. For the second, third, andfourth row withthree-passenger seats only,in the rear driver-sideseating positions, useanchor point (1). For therear passenger-side seatingpositions, use anchorpoint (2). For the centerseating positions, useanchor point (2). Neverinstall two top tethers usingthe same top tether anchor.

2.3. Route and tighten the toptether according to yourchild restraint instructionsand the followinginstructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.



If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas an integrated headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas an integrated headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theheadrest or head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,

grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.



If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑40 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑40 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑39.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle safety belt through oraround the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.





4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑40 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.



Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat withPassenger SensingSystem)This vehicle has airbags. A rear seatis a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑39.

On vehicles with a passengersensing system, the system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑26 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑16 for more information,including important safetyinformation.


{ WARNING


Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑26 for additionalinformation.


If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑40 for how andwhere to install the child restraint



using LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑40 fortop tether anchor locations.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑16.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.








7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑40 for more information.


If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If the child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a



Child Restraint” under PassengerSensing System on page 3‑26 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat with AirbagOn/Off Switch)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑39.

On vehicles with an airbag on/offswitch, you can use this feature toturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag. The switch is locatedon the instrument panel. See AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3‑23 formore information, includingimportant safety information.


{ WARNING


Even if the airbag switch hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the right front

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag could inflateeven though the airbag on-offswitch is turned off.



If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑40 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see Lower

Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑40 fortop tether anchor locations.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

If you have no other choice butto install a rear-facing childrestraint in this seat, make surethe airbag is off once the childrestraint has been installed.

When the airbag off switch hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator in the airbag off lightshould light and stay lit when thevehicle is started. See AirbagOn-Off Light on page 5‑15.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle safety belt through oraround the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.




Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckledif necessary.






7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑40 for more information.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

If you turned the airbag off with theswitch, turn on the right frontpassenger airbag when you removethe child restraint from the vehicleunless the person who will be sittingthere is a member of a passengerairbag risk group. See AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3‑23 formore information, includingimportant safety information.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsFront Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

StorageCompartments

Front StorageThis vehicle may have a frontstorage compartment. It is located atthe center of the instrument panelextension, by the floor. To open thecompartment, pull up on the latch.The compartment will openautomatically.

Storage compartments may also beincluded on the inside of eachfront door.


4-2 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-14Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-14Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-17MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-21StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-21Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-22

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-23Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-30Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-30Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-30Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-32Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-32Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-33Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-33Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-35Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-35Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-37Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-38


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

For vehicles with a tilt steeringwheel, the lever is located on theleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever to move thesteering wheel up or down into acomfortable position.

2. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

If available, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑34 formore information on other steeringwheel control.

w (Next): Press to go to the nextfavorite radio station, track on a CD,or folder on an iPod® or USBdevice.

c /x (Previous/End): Press togo to the previous favorite radiostation, track on a CD, or folder onan iPod® or USB device. Also pressto reject an incoming call, or end acurrent call.

Radio

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous radiostation stored as a preset orfavorite.

CD

To select tracks on a CD:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous track.

Selecting Tracks on an iPod orUSB Device

1. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.



2. Press and releasew orc /xto scroll up or down the list, thenpress and holdw , or press ¨ toplay the highlighted track.

Navigating Folders on an iPod orUSB Device

1. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and holdc /x to goback to the previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orc /xto scroll up or down the list.. To select a folder, press

and holdw , or press ¨when the folder ishighlighted.

. To go back further in thefolder list, press and holdc /x.

b / g (Push to Talk): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar® systems, press and holdfor longer than two seconds tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth on page 7‑21 and OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

SRCE (Source/VoiceRecognition): Press to switchbetween the radio and CD, and forequipped vehicles, the frontauxiliary.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to the nextradio station while in AM, FM,or SiriusXM®.

For vehicles with a CD Player orUSB port:

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

While listening to a CD, press andhold ¨ to quickly move forwardthrough the tracks. Release to stopon the desired track.

+ e : Press to increase volume.

− e : Press to decrease volume.

HornPress the horn symbol in the middleof the steering wheel to soundthe horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control islocated on the multifunction lever onthe left side of the steering wheel.

Turn the band withN on it to selectthe wiper speed.



8 (Mist): Use for a single wipe.Hold the band onz, then release.For several wipes, hold the band onz longer.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Useto adjust the delay time betweenwipes. Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

d (Low Speed): Slow wipes.

a (High Speed): Fast wipes.

9 (Off): Use to turn the wipers off.

When driving during the day and thewipers are activated, the headlamps automatically turn on aftercompleting eight wipe cycles.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged blades shouldbe replaced.

Windshield Washer

The windshield wiper paddle islocated on top of the multifunctionlever.

L (Washer Fluid): Push thepaddle to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers will clear thewindow and then either stop orreturn to the preset speed.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThis vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone

Your dealer will set the correct zonefor your location.

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.



To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving. Onlyset it when the vehicle is inP (Park).

PressT until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press V to scroll through andselect the appropriatevariance zone.

4. Press3 until the vehicleheading, for example, N forNorth, is displayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.

It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CB orcell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.



To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zone isset to the variance zone in whichthe vehicle is located. See“Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, climatecontrols, seats, etc. during thecalibration procedure.

2. PressT until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press V to start the compasscalibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehicle intight circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will display

CALIBRATION COMPLETE for afew seconds when thecalibration is complete. The DICdisplay will then return toPRESS V TO CALIBRATECOMPASS.

ClockThe clock can be set with either theradio turned on or off.

AM/FM Radio

To set the time:

1. Press H until the hour beginsflashing on the display. Pressthis button a second time andthe minutes begin flashing ondisplay.

Press H a third time and the12HR or 24HR time formatbegins flashing.

2. While either the hour or theminutes are flashing, turn the fknob, on the upper right side ofthe radio, clockwise or

counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the time. While the12HR or 24HR time format isflashing, turn the f knobclockwise or counterclockwise toselect the default time settings.

3. Press H again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set thecurrently displayed time;otherwise, the flashing stopsafter five seconds and thecurrent time displayed isautomatically set.

Radio with CD/MP3

To set the time and date:

1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) displays.

2. Press the softkey under any oneof the tabs to be changed. Everytime the softkey is pressedagain, the time or the date ifselected, increases by one.



Another way to increase the timeor date, is to press ¨ SEEK or\ FWD (forward).

3. To decrease, press © SEEK ors REV. Turn the f knob, onthe upper right side of the radio,to adjust the selected setting.

Changing the Time and DateDefault Settings

To change the time or date defaultsettings:

1. Press H and then the softkeyunder the forward arrow that iscurrently displayed on the radioscreen until the time 12H (hour)and 24H (hour), and the dateMM/DD (month and day) andDD/MM (day and month) aredisplayed.

2. Press the softkey under thedesired option.

3. Press H again to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets on theinstrument panel.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible to the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle or adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑57.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterTo use the cigarette lighter, if thevehicle has one, push it in all theway, and let go. When it is ready foruse, it will pop back out by itself.



Do not use the lighter to plug inaccessory devices. Use the poweroutlets provided.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.

AshtraysThe vehicle may have a removableashtray. The ashtray can be placedinto the front floor consolecupholder. Open cover to use.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English 4‐Speed Version Shown, 6‐Speed and Metric Similar



If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper‐resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it mustbe set at zero and a label must beput on the driver door to show theold mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last setto zero.

Press the3 on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) switch todisplay the trip odometer and theregular odometer information.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑24 for more informationon resetting the trip odometer.

To display the odometer readingwith the ignition off, press the3on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) switch.

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English



The fuel gauge, when the ignition ison, indicates how much fuel is left inthe vehicle fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

The gauge first indicates emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, andthe fuel tank should berefueled soon.

Listed are four situations customersmight experience with the fuelgauge. None of these indicate aproblem with the fuel gauge:. At the gas station, the fuel pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge does not go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.


Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric



English

The oil pressure gauge shows theengine oil pressure in psi (poundsper square inch) or kPa (kilopascals)when the engine is running.

Oil pressure may vary with enginespeed, outside temperature and oilviscosity, but readings above thelow pressure zone indicate thenormal operating range.

A reading in the low pressure zonemay be caused by a dangerouslylow oil level or other problemcausing low oil pressure.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric



English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of howhard the vehicle is working. During amajority of the operation, the gaugewill read 100°C (210°F) or less.If the vehicle is pulling a load orgoing up hills, it is normal for thetemperature to fluctuate andapproach the 122°C (250°F) mark.If the gauge reaches the 125°C(260°F) mark, it indicates that thecooling system is working beyondits capacity.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20.

Voltmeter Gauge

When the engine is not running, butthe ignition is on, this gauge showsthe battery's state of charge inDC volts.

When the engine is running, thegauge shows the condition of thecharging system. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zonemay occur when a large number ofelectrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is leftat an idle for an extended period.This condition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can be only driven for ashort time with the reading in eitherwarning zone. If it must be driven,turn off all unnecessaryaccessories.

Readings in either warning zoneindicate a possible problem in theelectrical system. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible.



Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind the driver to fasten theirsafety belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle may continue several times ifthe driver remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There may be a passenger safetybelt reminder light near thepassenger airbag status indicator.See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑26.

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt warning light,when the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind passengers to fasten theirsafety belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle continues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system (if equipped), thepretensioners (if equipped), theairbag modules, the wiring, and thecrash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3‑16.



The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5‑35.

Airbag On-Off LightWhen the right front passengerairbag is manually turned off usingthe airbag on-off switch on theinstrument panel, if equipped, theindicator light OFF or the off symbolwill come on and stay on as areminder that the airbag has beenturned off. This light will go off whenthe airbag has been turned on. SeeAirbag On-Off Switch on page 3‑23for more information, includingimportant safety information.

United States

Canada and Mexico



{ WARNING

If the right front passenger airbagis turned off for a person who isnot in a risk group identified bythe national government, thatperson will not have the extraprotection of an airbag. In acrash, the airbag will not be ableto inflate and help protect theperson sitting there.

Do not turn off the passengerairbag unless the person sittingthere is in a risk group identifiedby the national government. SeeAirbag On-Off Switch onpage 3‑23 for more on this,including important safetyinformation.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the right frontpassenger airbag could inflateeven though the airbag on-offswitch is turned off.


If the word ON or the on symbol islit, it means that the right frontpassenger frontal airbag is enabled,and may inflate. See Airbag On-OffSwitch on page 3‑23 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorIf the vehicle has a passengersensing system, the instrumentpanel will have a passenger airbagstatus indicator. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑26 forimportant safety information.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several seconds



as a system check. If you are usingremote start, if equipped, to start thevehicle from a distance, you maynot see the system check. Then,after several more seconds, thestatus indicator will light either ONor OFF, or either the on or offsymbol to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger frontalairbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled, and may inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can also appear. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑30 for moreinformation. This light could indicatethat there are problems with agenerator drive belt, or that there isan electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissions



are at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9‑15.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that theOBD II system has detected aproblem and diagnosis and servicemight be required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system also

assists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/

Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,



follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑45. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,

stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑42.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, the

emission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission control



systems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, therecould be a brake problem. Have thebrake system inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑31 formore information. The light stays onif the parking brake does not fullyrelease. If it stays on after theparking brake is fully released, itmeans the vehicle has a brakeproblem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal might go closer to thefloor. It could take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑80.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.

If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑20.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑29.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

Press and release the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrakbutton to turn off TCS, and amessage displays in the DIC.

Press and briefly hold the TCS/StabiliTrak button to turn off theStabiliTrak system; the StabiliTrakOff light comes on and a messageappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).



If the StabiliTrak/TCS system is off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theStabiliTrak/TCS system and theindicator light turns off.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑32, and Ride Control SystemMessages on page 5‑34 for moreinformation.

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light comes on brieflywhen the engine is started.

If the light does not come on orstays on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer. If the system isworking normally, the indicator lightturns off.

If the light comes on and stays onwhile driving, and a messagedisplays in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑34 for more information.

If the light flashes while driving, thismeans that the StabiliTrak or theTCS is assisting in controlling thevehicle. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑32 for more information.

Four chimes sound if the lightturns on.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5‑36. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑52.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑54.



Engine Oil Pressure Light

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thengoes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and it mighthave some other system problem.

Low Fuel Warning Light

English Shown, Metric Similar

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light comes onand a chime sounds when thevehicle is low on fuel. The light turnsoff when fuel is added to thefuel tank.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑24.

Security Light

The immobilizer light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2‑11.



High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑34 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)This vehicle has a DIC.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay at the bottom of theinstrument cluster. The DIC buttonsare on the instrument panel, next tothe instrument cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

If the vehicle has these features, theDIC also displays the compassdirection and the outside airtemperature when viewing the tripand fuel information. The compassdirection appears on the top right



corner of the DIC display. Theoutside air temperatureautomatically appears in the bottomright corner of the DIC display.If there is a problem with the systemthat controls the temperaturedisplay, the numbers will bereplaced with dashes. If this occurs,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons on the instrumentpanel, next to the instrument cluster.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, fuel used, timer, averagespeed, and digital tachometer.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life, rearpark assist, units, tire pressurereadings for vehicles with the Tire

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS),engine hours, Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) programming forvehicles with the TPMS and withouta Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, and compass zone andcompass calibration on vehicleswith this feature.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on the vehicle. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑38 formore information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.



Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

Odometer

Press3 until XX km (mi)displays. This display shows thedistance the vehicle has beendriven in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi).

Trip Odometers

Press3 until A or B displays.This display shows the currentdistance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi) sincethe last reset for each trip odometer.Both trip odometers can be used atthe same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing V whilethe desired trip odometer isdisplayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. Thiscan be used to set the trip odometerto the number of kilometers (miles)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold V for at leastfour seconds. The trip odometer willdisplay the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivensince the ignition was last turned onand the vehicle was moving. Oncethe vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 miles) before it isstarted again, and then theretro-active reset feature isactivated, the display will show 8 km(5 miles). As the vehicle beginsmoving, the display will thenincrease to 8.1 km (5.1 miles),8.2 km (5.2 miles), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

Fuel Range

Press3 until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This display shows theapproximate number of remainingkilometers (km) or miles (mi) thevehicle can be driven withoutrefueling. The display will showLOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the fuel economyover recent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. This estimate will change ifdriving conditions change. Forexample, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in the



fuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.

If the vehicle is low on fuel, theFUEL LEVEL LOW message will bedisplayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”under Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑33 for more information.

Average Economy

Press3 until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.To reset AVG ECONOMY, press andhold V. The display will returnto zero.

Fuel Used

Press3 until FUEL USEDdisplays. This display shows thenumber of liters (L) or gallons (gal)of fuel used since the last reset ofthis menu item. To reset the fuelused information, press and hold Vwhile FUEL USED is displayed.

Timer

Press3 until TIMER displays.This display can be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press V whileTIMER is displayed. The display willshow the amount of time that haspassed since the timer was lastreset, not including time the ignitionis off. Time will continue to becounted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press V brieflywhile TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold V while TIMER is displayed.

Average Speed

Press3 until AVERAGE SPEEDdisplays. This display shows theaverage speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. To reset thevalue, press and hold V. Thedisplay will return to zero.

Digital Tachometer

Press3 untilTachometer ##00 RPM displays.This display shows the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (RPM).

Blank Display

This display shows no information.



Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Oil Life

PressT until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If you see99%OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you tochange the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑32. You should change theoil as soon as possible. See EngineOil on page 10‑6. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring the

oil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE yourself after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see EngineOil Life System on page 10‑8.

Park Assist

If the vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,pressT until PARK ASSISTdisplays. This display allows thesystem to be turned on or off. Oncein this display, press to selectbetween ON or OFF. The URPAsystem automatically turns back onafter each vehicle start. When theURPA system is turned off and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the

DIC will display the PARK ASSISTOFF message as a reminder thatthe system has been turned off. SeeObject Detection System Messageson page 5‑33 and UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑37 formore information.

Units

PressT until UNITS displays. Thisdisplay allows you to select betweenmetric or English units ofmeasurement. Once in this display,press V to select between METRICor ENGLISH units.

Tire Pressure

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either kilopascals (kPa) orpounds per square inch (psi). PressT until the DIC displays FRONTTIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. PressT again until theDIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.



If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you tocheck the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See TirePressure on page 10‑52 and TireMessages on page 5‑36 for moreinformation.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with the vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

Engine Hours

PressT until ENGINE HOURSdisplays. This display shows thetotal number of hours the enginehas run.

Relearn Tire Positions

The vehicle may have this display.To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). If the vehiclehas the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), after rotating thetires or after replacing a tire orsensor, the system must re-learn the

tire positions. To re-learn the tirepositions, see Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑53. See TireInspection on page 10‑57, TireRotation on page 10‑58 and TireMessages on page 5‑36 for moreinformation.

Change Compass Zone

The vehicle may have this feature.To change the compass zonethrough the DIC, see Compass onpage 5‑4.

Calibrate Compass

The vehicle may have this feature.The compass can be manuallycalibrated. To calibrate the compassthrough the DIC, see Compass onpage 5‑4.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V (Set/Reset).

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously and clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages and some informationabout them.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.



Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Undercertain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on in theinstrument cluster. See ChargingSystem Light on page 5‑17. Drivingwith this problem could drain thebattery. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Have the electricalsystem checked as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑20. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possible

and turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Compass Messages

CALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES

This message displays whencalibrating the compass. Drive thevehicle in circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete the calibration.See Compass on page 5‑4 for moreinformation.

CALIBRATION COMPLETE

This message displays when thecompass calibration is complete.See Compass on page 5‑4 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

CARGO DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the cargo door is openwhile the ignition is in ON/RUN.Turn off the vehicle and check thecargo door. Restart the vehicle andcheck for the message on the DICdisplay.

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is in a drivegear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to seeif the message still appears onthe DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if thedriver side rear door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is in a drivegear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions, and



close the door again. Check to seeif the message still appears onthe DIC.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger door is notfully closed and the vehicle is in adrive gear. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if thepassenger side rear door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is in a drivegear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to seeif the message still appears onthe DIC.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C (AirConditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑12. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine, the airconditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive the vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument clusterand/or DIC, stop the vehicle assoon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑20.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑12.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument clusterand/or DIC, stop the vehicle assoon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑20.



This message displays and a chimesounds if the engine cooling systemreaches unsafe temperatures foroperation. Stop and turn off thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do soto avoid severe damage. Thismessage clears when the enginehas cooled to a safe operatingtemperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑8 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑6 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 for moreinformation.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL

If the vehicle has an oil level sensor,this message displays if the oil levelin the vehicle is low. Check the oillevel and correct it as necessary.You may need to let the vehicle coolor warm up and cycle the ignition tobe sure this message clears. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑6 foradditional information.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine oil pressure islow, severe engine damage mayoccur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Donot drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑6 for more information.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possible

and do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10‑6.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimesounds when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑20for further information.

This message also displays whenthe engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, but



acceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimesounds if the fuel level is low. Refuelas soon as possible. See FuelGauge on page 5‑10 and Fuel onpage 9‑41 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument cluster if the fuel cap isnot tightened properly. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑17. Reinstall the fuel capfully. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑45. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed.

A loose or missing fuel cap allowsfuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑2.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned off.See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 for more information.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (3/4 of a mile). Move the turnsignal/multifunction lever to the offposition.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL

This message displays if there issomething interfering with the parkassist system. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑37 formore information.



PARK ASSIST OFF

After the vehicle has been started,this message displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system hasbeen turned off. Press the set/resetbutton or the trip odometer resetstem to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display. Toturn the URPA system back on, seeUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑37.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system. Donot use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑37 for more information.See your dealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak® andthis message displays, it meansthere may be a problem with theStabiliTrak system. If you see thismessage, try to reset the system.Stop; turn off the engine for at least15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comeson, it means there is a problem. Youshould see your dealer for service.The vehicle is safe to drive,however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when there is aproblem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). When this messagedisplays, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your driving

accordingly. See your dealer forservice. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑32 for more information.

STABILITRAK INITIALIZING

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage may display until firstdriving the vehicle and exceeding40 km/h (25 mph) for two minutes.The StabiliTrak system is notfunctional until this message hasturned off. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑32 for more information.

TRACTION XXSTABILITRAK XX

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when the tractioncontrol and/or StabiliTrak systemshave been turned on or off. Adjustyour driving accordingly. To limitwheel spin and realize the fullbenefits of the stabilityenhancement system, you shouldnormally leave StabiliTrak on.However, you should turnStabiliTrak off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow



and you want to rock the vehicle toattempt to free it, or if you aredriving in extreme off-roadconditions and require more wheelspin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9‑9. To turn the StabiliTraksystem on or off, see StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑32.

STABILITRAK OFF may alsodisplay when the stability controlhas been automatically disabled.There are several conditions thatcan cause this message to appear.. One condition is overheating,

which could occur if StabiliTrakactivates continuously for anextended period of time.

. The message also displays if thebrake system warning light is on.See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑20.

. The message could display if thestability system takes longerthan usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to drivingconditions.

. The message displays if anengine or vehicle relatedproblem has been detected andthe vehicle needs service. Seeyour dealer.

The message turns off as soon asthe conditions that caused themessage to be displayed are nolonger present.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14 andAirbag System on page 3‑16 formore information.

Security Messages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may not

restart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 2‑11 for moreinformation.

WAIT TO START

This message displays briefly whenthe theft-deterrent system hasinitially found incorrect conditionswithin the vehicle and is making adouble check. If your vehicle doesnot start soon after, try to start itagain. If it still does not start, haveyour vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE A/C SYSTEM

This message displays when theelectronic sensors that control theair conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if you noticea drop in heating and airconditioning efficiency.



SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING DISABLEDSERVICE THROTTLE

This message displays if the startingof the engine is disabled due to theelectronic throttle control system.Have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately.

This message only appears whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN, and willnot disappear until the problem isresolved.

This message cannot beacknowledged.

Tire Messages

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE orTIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the

pressure in one or more of the tiresis low. The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑22. Thismessage will also indicate which tireneeds to be checked. You canreceive more than one tire pressuremessage at a time. To read theother messages that may have beensent at the same time, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressuremessage appears on the DIC, stopas soon as you can. Have the tirepressures checked and set to thoseshown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Tires onpage 10‑43, Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑52. The DIC also showsthe tire pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑24.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on the

system is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5‑22. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑54 formore information. If the warningcomes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TPMS. Seeyour dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the systemis re-learning the tire positions onthe vehicle. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑24 for moreinformation. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection on page 10‑57,Tire Rotation on page 10‑58, TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑54, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑52 for more information.



Transmission Messages

GRADE BRAKING DISABLED

This message displays when thegrade braking has been disabledwith the tow/haul mode button onthe end of the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑29, AutomaticTransmission (Six Speed) onpage 9‑22 or AutomaticTransmission (Four Speed) onpage 9‑26, and Cruise Control onpage 9‑34.

GRADE BRAKING ENABLED

This message displays when thegrade braking has been enabledwith the tow/haul mode button onthe end of the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑29, AutomaticTransmission (Six Speed) onpage 9‑22 or AutomaticTransmission (Four Speed) onpage 9‑26, and Cruise Control onpage 9‑34.

GRADE BRAKING ON

This message displays when thegrade braking has been activatedwhile driving on downhill grades.This message will only appear thefirst time the feature is activated inan ignition cycle. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑29, AutomaticTransmission (Six Speed) onpage 9‑22 or AutomaticTransmission (Four Speed) onpage 9‑26, and Cruise Control onpage 9‑34.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer for service.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: Do not drive the vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument cluster and/orDIC, or the transmission can be

damaged. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty.

This message displays along with achime if the transmission fluid in thevehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears and the chimestops when the fluid temperaturereaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.



VehiclePersonalizationThis vehicle may havecustomization capabilities that allowyou to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen the vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from theirdefault state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press U to enter the featuresettings menu.

If the menu is not available,FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK willdisplay. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicle isin P (Park).

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press U until the PRESS V TODISPLAY IN ENGLISH screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to displayall DIC messages in English.

LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.



Press U until the LANGUAGEscreen appears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press U toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

ARABIC: All messages will appearin Arabic.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press V whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC. A beep will sound once alanguage has been selected.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the doors willautomatically lock.

Press U until AUTO DOOR LOCKappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.


To select a setting, press V whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.

It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock.

Press U until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressU to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park) .

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).





REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑2 for more information.

Press U until REMOTE DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press U toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press Q on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press Q on theRKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of Q on theRKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress Q on the RKE transmitter, and

the horn will sound when Q ispressed again within five seconds ofthe previous command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receive

feedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑2 for moreinformation.

Press U until REMOTE DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressU to scroll through the followingsettings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you press K onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press Kon the RKE transmitter.





DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thedoors will be delayed. When lockingthe doors with the power door lockswitch and a door is open, thisfeature will delay locking the doorsuntil five seconds after the last dooris closed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice or Qon the RKE transmitter twice. SeeDelayed Locking on page 2‑7 formore information.

Press U until DELAY DOOR LOCKappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when itis dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press U until EXIT LIGHTINGappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

10 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for10 seconds.

1MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for twominutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlamps turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.



Press U until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressU to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lamps will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.The lamps will remain on for20 seconds or until Q on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, or the vehicleis no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑2 for moreinformation.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press U until CHIME VOLUMEappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press U until FACTORY SETTINGSappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.



Press U until FEATURE SETTINGS

PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the

DIC display. Press V once to exitthe menu.

If you do not exit, pressing U willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.

. The3 orT DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesEntry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn the control tothis position to turn the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) off or back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works forvehicles that are shifted into theP (Park) position.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns on theheadlamps automatically at normalbrightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps


6-2 Lighting

If the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. If the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will continue to stayon. To prevent the battery frombeing drained, turn the control to theO position.

A warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignitionswitch is off and the headlampsare on.

To change the headlamps from lowbeam to high beam, pull the turnsignal lever all the way toward you.Then release it.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turnedon and the key is out of the ignition.To turn off the chime, turn theheadlamp switch to O or AUTO and

then back on, or close and re‐openthe door. In the auto mode, theheadlamps turn off once the ignitionis in LOCK/OFF or may remain onuntil the headlamp delay ends,if enabled in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “Exit Lighting”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Pull the turn signal leverall the way toward you to changethe headlamps from low to highbeam. Then release it.

This instrument cluster light comeson when the high-beam headlampsare on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or in thelow‐beam position, pull the turnsignal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional daytimerunning lamps are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system comes on indaylight when the followingconditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamp control is in

the AUTO position.


Lighting 6-3

. The shift lever is not in P (Park).

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL are on, the taillamps,sidemarker, instrument panel lights,and other lamps will not be on.

The automatic headlamp systemautomatically switches from DRL tothe headlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to O and then releaseit. For vehicles first sold in Canada,the transmission must be in theP (Park) position, before the DRLcan be turned off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe headlamp switch is in AUTO,the automatic headlamp systemturns on the headlamps, along withthe taillamps, sidemarker lamps,

parking lamps, and the instrumentpanel lights. The radio lights willalso be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lampcontrol to the off position and thenrelease. For vehicles first sold inCanada, the transmission must bein the P (Park) position, before theautomatic headlamp system can beturned off.

The vehicle has a light sensor onthe top of the instrument panel. Donot cover the sensor; otherwise thesystem will come on whenever theignition is on.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp system so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automaticheadlamp system are only affectedwhen the light sensor sees achange in lighting lasting longerthan the delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes approximately 30 secondsfor the automatic headlamp systemto change to DRL if it is lightoutside. During that delay, theinstrument cluster may not be asbright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness control


6-4 Lighting

is in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble. Press again toturn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

G (Turn Signals): An arrow onthe instrument cluster flashes in thedirection of the turn or lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever allthe way up or down.

To signal a lane change, raise orlower the lever until the arrow startsto flash. The turn signalautomatically flashes three timesand if the Tow/Haul Mode is active itflashes six times. Holding the turnsignal lever for more thanone second causes the turn signalsto flash continually until the lever isreleased.


Lighting 6-5

The lever returns to its startingposition when released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have any burned out bulbsreplaced. If a bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10‑37.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURNSIGNAL ON also appears in theDriver Information Center (DIC). SeeLamp Messages on page 5‑33. Toturn off the chime and message,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThe knob for this feature is to theleft of the steering column.

D (Instrument Panel Lights):Push the knob to extend and thenturn clockwise or counterclockwiseto brighten or dim the instrumentpanel lights and the radio display.This only works if the headlamps orparking lamps are on.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The instrument panel brightnessknob extends whenD is pressed.To manually turn on the domelamps, pressD then turn the knobclockwise to the farthest position. Inthis position, the dome lampsremain on whether a door is openedor closed.

Dome Lamp Override

TheE DOME OFF button is abovethe instrument panelbrightness knob.


6-6 Lighting

The dome lamp override sets thedome lamps to remain off or comeon automatically when a door isopened.

E DOME OFF: Press this buttonin and the dome lamps remain offwhen a door is opened. Press thebutton again to return it to theextended position so that the domelamps come on when a door isopened.

Reading LampsFor vehicles with reading lamps,press the button next to each lampto turn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.

Lighting Features

Entry/Exit LightingThe vehicle has an illuminatedentry/exit feature.

The dome lamps come on if theEDOME OFF button is in theextended position, when a door isopened, or the key is removed fromthe ignition.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle may have ElectricPower Management (EPM) thatestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehicle


Lighting 6-7

has a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.

It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM.If this messages displays, it isrecommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible. See Battery Voltage andCharging Messages on page 5‑30.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the domelamps if they are left on for morethan 10 minutes when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. This helps to preventthe battery from running down.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview (AM-FM Radio) . . . . . 7-2Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 7-4Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Fixed Mast Antenna(Multi-Band) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Fixed MastAntenna (Care) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Introduction

InfotainmentIf the vehicle came without a radio,the wiring provisions for a radio andan antenna were installed at theassembly plant, so that if you want,a radio can be installed at thedealer.

Determine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

Notice: The chime signals relatedto safety belts, parking brake, andother functions of the vehicleoperate through the radio/entertainment system. If thatequipment is replaced or


7-2 Infotainment System

additional equipment is added tothe vehicle, the chimes may notwork. Make sure that replacementor additional equipment iscompatible with the vehiclebefore installing it. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑19 for moreinformation.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the navigation manual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.

Overview (AM-FM Radio)

Overview (AM-FM Radio)



1. 4 (Information)

. Press to show informationon the current station ortrack.

2. Buttons 1 - 6. Saves and selects favorite

stations.

3. f (Tone/Tune)

. Press to set the bass ortreble.

. Turn to manually selectradio stations.

4. BAND. Press to scroll through the

available bands AM, FM,or XM if equipped.

5. © SEEK

. Seeks the previous station.

6. ¨ SEEK

. Seeks the next station.

7. P (Power/Volume)

. Press to turn theinfotainment system onor off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

8. H (Clock)

. Press to set the clock.

9. EQ (Equalizer). Press to adjust the

equalizer settings.

10. x w (Fade/Balance)

. Press to set the fade andbalance.



Overview (Radio with CD)

Overview (Radio with CD)

1. 4 (Information)

. Press to show informationon the current station ortrack.

2. FAV (Favorites Pages). Press to scroll through the

favorite pages.

3. MENU. Press to open the tone

menu to adjust the bass,midrange, treble, fade, andbalance.

4. Buttons 1 - 6. Saves and selects favorite

stations.

5. EQ (Equalizer). Press to adjust the

equalizer.

6. f (Tone/Tune)

. Press to set the bass ortreble.

. Turn to manually selectradio stations.



7. CAT (Category). Press to display a list of XM

categories.

8. H (Clock)

. Press to set the clock.

9. BAND. Press to scroll through the

available bands AM, FM,or XM if equipped.

10. © SEEK

. Seeks the previousstation.

11. ¨ SEEK

. Seeks the next station.

12. P (Power/Volume)

. Press to turn theinfotainment system onor off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

13. s REV (Reverse)

. Press and hold to gobackward fast through atrack.

14. \ FWD (Forward)

. Press and hold to fastforward through a track.

15. CD/AUX. Press to scroll through

selecting the CD or anauxiliary device.

16. Auxiliary Input Jack. Use to connect external

audio devices.

17. Z EJECT

. Press to eject theloaded CD.

Operation

Using the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the volume.

4 (Information): Press to switchthe display between the radiostation frequency and the time.While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time. Press todisplay additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDSstation or MP3 song. A choice ofadditional information such asChannel, Song, Artist, and CAT(category) can display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired tab,or press the softkey under any oneof the tabs and the informationabout that tab displays.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): Radios with CD have SCVthat automatically adjust the radiovolume to compensate for road and



wind noise as the vehicle speedchanges while driving, so that thevolume level stays consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) tab on the radio display.

4. Press the softkey under thedesired SCV setting (OFF, Low,Med, or High) to select the levelof radio volume compensation.The display times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Eachhigher setting allows for moreradio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press the f knob until Bass orTreble displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK.

EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL, or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press` or press the f knobuntil the speaker control tabdisplays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibrated for thevehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer for service.

VIN or NO VIN: One of thesemessages will display when theTheftLock system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The radio may have an RDS. TheRDS feature is available for useonly on FM stations that broadcastRDS information. This system reliesupon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only workswhen the information is available.While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display. In rare cases,a radio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, and XM. Theselection displays.

f (Tune): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the station frequency.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press ©SEEK to go to the previous or ¨SEEK to go to the next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and holdeither button for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. ForAM-FM Radio and Radio with CD,the station frequency flashes whilethe radio is in the scan mode. Presseither button again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans stationsonly with a strong signal that are inthe selected band.

For AM-FM Radio and Radio withCD, scan presets within the currentselected band by pressing andholding either SEEK button forfour seconds until a double beepsounds. The radio goes to a storedpreset, plays for a few seconds if a

strong signal is present, then goesto the next stored preset. Thestation frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode.

Setting Preset Stations

If the radio does not have a FAVbutton, up to 18 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM), can beprogrammed on the six numberedsoftkeys, by performing the followingsteps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1,FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the sixnumbered softkeys forthree seconds until a beepsounds. When that softkey ispressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

5. Repeat Steps 2–4 for eachsoftkey.



Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set upradio station favorites while thevehicle is parked. Tune to favoritestations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature. SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑3.

FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle hasa FAV button, a maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press theFAV button to go through up tosix pages of favorites, each havingsix favorite stations available perpage. Each page of favorites cancontain any combination of AM andFM stations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station is tobe stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the station thatwas set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for eachsoftkey radio station to be storedas a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites for the chosen numberof numbered pages.

Satellite RadioSiriusXM®, if equipped, is a satelliteradio service based in the UnitedStates and Canada only.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find XM stations (ifequipped) while the radio is in theXM mode.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, and XM. Theselection displays.



f (Tune): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the station frequency.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press ©SEEK to go to the previous or ¨SEEK to go to the next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and holdeither button for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Thestation frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode. Presseither button again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans stationsonly with a strong signal that are inthe selected band.

To scan presets within the currentselected band by pressing andholding either SEEK button forfour seconds until a double beepsounds. The radio goes to a storedpreset, plays for a few seconds if astrong signal is present, then goes

to the next stored preset. Thestation frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode.

Setting Preset Stations

If the radio does not have a FAVbutton, up to 18 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM), can beprogrammed on the six numberedsoftkeys, by performing the followingsteps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1,FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the sixnumbered softkeys forthree seconds until a beepsounds. When that softkey ispressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

5. Repeat Steps 2–4 for eachsoftkey.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set upradio station favorites while thevehicle is parked. Tune to favoritestations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature. SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑3.

FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle hasa FAV button, a maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press theFAV button to go through up tosix pages of favorites, each havingsix favorite stations available perpage. Each page of favorites cancontain any combination of AM andFM stations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.



To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station is tobe stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the station thatwas set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for eachsoftkey radio station to be storedas a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites for the chosen numberof numbered pages.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stations

boost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM stereo gives the best sound, butFM signals reach only about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Tall buildings orhills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade inand out.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the radio. Thisinterference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.



Fixed Mast Antenna(Multi-Band)The multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for OnStar® and the SiriusXM®

Satellite Radio Service System if thevehicle has these features. Keepthe antenna clear of obstructions forclear reception. Make sure there issufficient clearance when enteringgarages or parking structures.

Fixed MastAntenna (Care)The fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base. If themast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Make sure there is sufficientclearance when entering garages orparking structures.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

Audio Players

CD Player

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD.It could get caught in the CD. If aCD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners is notadvised, due to the risk ofcontaminating the lens of the CDoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep



the CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD PlayerMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint-free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixedwith water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Inserting a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Ejecting a CD

Z EJECT: Press and release toeject the disc. Remove the CDwhen Remove Disc displays. If thedisc is not removed, after severalseconds the disc is automaticallypulled back into the player.

Playing a CD

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CDsymbol displays on the left side ofthe radio display. As each new trackstarts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press tocycle between CD or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing the discand/or track number will displaywhen a CD is in the player. Pressagain and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary inputdevice; see Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑16. If a portable audio playeris not connected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of the



display and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, NOINFO displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe current track if more than10 seconds on the CD have played.

Press to go to the previous track ifless than 10 seconds on the CDhave played.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving backwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly within atrack.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track.

RDM (Random): For Radios withCD/MP3. Press to listen to tracks inrandom, rather than sequentialorder.

To use random:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

MP3-Supported Files

Radios with CD/MP3 have thecapability of playing an MP3 CD-Ror CD-RW disc.

Format

Radios that have the capability ofplaying MP3s can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files canbe recorded with the following fixedbit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,

128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps ora variable bit rate.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3 files. If both formatsare on the disc, the radio reads allMP3 files first, then theuncompressed CD audio files.

CD-R- or CD-RW-Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:. Up to 50 folders.. Up to eight folders in depth.. Up to 50 playlists.. Up to 255 files.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl

extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda

file extension.



Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a CD display asF1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists (Px).. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks in

each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name contained in the ID3 tag.If the song name is not present inthe ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text, and the extension ofthe file name is not displayed.

Preprogrammed Playlists

CDs that have preprogrammedplaylists created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,there is no playlist-editing capabilityusing the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Playlists can be changed by usingthe softkeys below the Sc andc T tabs, the f knob, the © SEEKbutton, or the ¨ SEEK button. AnMP3 CD-R or CD-RW that has beenrecorded without using file folderscan be played. If a CD-R or CD-RWcontains more than the maximum of50 folders, 15 playlists, and512 folders and files, the playerallows access and navigates up tothe maximum, but all items over themaximum are not accessible.



Playing an MP3

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, NOINFO displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3s onthe CD currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the file displays.Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thefile displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below the Sc tab togo to the first track in the previousfolder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey below thec T tab to go tothe first track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): For Radios withCD/MP3. Press to listen to tracks inrandom, rather than sequentialorder.

To use random:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey below theh tab to playthe files in order by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey below either arrowtab. The disc goes to the next orprevious artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either softkeybelow the arrow tab until the desiredartist displays.



To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey below the SortBy tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe Album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrows,and songs from the current albumbegin to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3s from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD ejects, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radio

displays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

Radios with an auxiliary input jackon the lower right side of thefaceplate can connect to an externalaudio device such as an iPod®,MP3 player, or CD player, for use asanother source for audio listening.This input jack is not an audiooutput; do not plug headphones intothe front auxiliary input jack.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑3 formore information on driverdistraction.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.



When a device is connected, pressthe radio CD/AUX button to beginplaying audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

For optimal sound quality, increasethe portable audio device's volumeto the loudest level.

It is always best to power theportable audio device through itsown battery while playing.

O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the volume of the portableplayer. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audio

player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

Using the USB Port

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPod®

using the radio buttons and knobs.See “Playing an MP3” in CD Playeron page 7‑11 for information abouthow to connect and control a USBstorage device or an iPod.

USB Support

The USB port is on the instrumentpanel and uses the USB 2.0standard.

USB-Supported Devices. USB flash drive. Portable USB hard drive. Fifth generation or later iPod. iPod nano®

. iPod touch®

. iPod classic®

Not all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple® for properoperation. iPod firmware canbe updated using the latestiTunes® application. Seewww.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying the iPod, goto www.apple.com/support.



Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that arestored on a USB storage device aswell as AAC files that are stored onan iPod.

USB-Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to eight folders in depth.. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes.. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension.. AAC files stored on an iPod.. FAT16.. FAT32.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod

The USB port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB porton the instrument panel.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port on theinstrument panel. If the vehicle is onand the USB connection works, “OKto disconnect” and a GM logo mayappear on the iPod, and iPodappears on the radio display. TheiPod music appears on the radiodisplay and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and will notcharge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the auxiliaryinput jack using a standard 3.5 mm

(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” previously inthis section.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs, anddisplay song information on theradio display.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume.



Releases REV to resume playing.The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.

j (Pause): Press the softkey belowj to pause the track. The tabappears raised when pause is beingused. Press the softkey below jagain to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theBack tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder on theUSB drive. To browse and selectfiles:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the desiredfolder. If there is more then onefolder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 untilthe desired folder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:. Playlists



. Artists

. Albums

. Genres

. Songs

. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select thedesired menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through thefolders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.

. Second softkey, 1% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,C, or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): Press thesoftkey below2 to turn shuffleoff. This is the default mode when aUSB storage device or iPod is firstconnected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs/ShuffleSongs): Press the softkey below= orC to shuffle all songs onthe USB storage device or iPod.

C (Shuffle Album): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.



Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth-capable cell phone with aHands-Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.



When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons on the steeringwheel to operate the in-vehicleBluetooth system. See SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

b / g (Push to Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

c /x (End): Press to end a call,reject a call, or cancel an operation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if equipped. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.



3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seethe cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.



Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the system

repeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”



Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling 911 Emergency



3. Say “911.”



Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”




Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressc /x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc /x to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc /x to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b / g ,and then say “Un-mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.



Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.



Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . 8-4Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

Vehicles without Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control



9 (Fan Control): Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

9 (Off): Turns the system off.

Temperature Control: Turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnthe knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to change thecurrent airflow mode.


8-2 Climate Controls

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets, with some air directedtoward the windshield.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the windshield and side windows.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Outsideair is directed to the floor anddefroster outlets. Adjust thetemperature knob for warmer orcooler air. The air conditioningcompressor might turn on in thissetting to dehumidify the air.

1 (Defrost): This mode clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield, with some to the flooroutlets and front side windows. Theair conditioning compressor mightturn on in this setting to dehumidifythe air.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.



Vehicles with Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control



4. Rear Window Defogger

On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps to reduce the timeneeded for the vehicle to cool downand the system operates moreefficiently.

# (Air Conditioning): Cools anddehumidifies the air inside of thevehicle.

V (Maximum Air Conditioning):Cools the air inside the vehiclefaster, by recirculating the inside air.

Rear Window Defogger

For vehicles with a rear windowdefogger, a warming grid is used toremove fog or frost from the rearwindow.

It only works when the ignition is inON/RUN.

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger turns offseveral minutes after the button ispressed. If turned on again, thedefogger will run for several moreminutes before turning off. Thedefogger can also be turned off byturning off the engine.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.



Rear Heating SystemFor vehicles with a rear heatingsystem, it lets you adjust theamount of air flowing into the rear ofthe vehicle, from the front-seatingarea. This feature works with themain climate-control system in thevehicle.

AUX: The thumbwheel for thissystem is located in the instrumentpanel switchbank below the audiosystem.

9 (Fan): Turn the thumbwheel upor down to increase or decrease theamount of heated air sent to therear-seating area.

Q (High): This position supplies themost amount of heat to therear-seating area.

c (Medium): This positionsupplies half the amount of heat tothe rear‐seating area.

R (Low): This position supplies theleast amount of heat to therear-seating area.

9 (Off): Turns the rear heatingsystem off.



Rear Climate Control SystemFor vehicles with a rear heating and air-conditioning system, it controls thetemperature, fan speed and air delivery for the rear-seat passengers only.The front climate control panel is located in the overhead console betweenthe driver and front passenger.

Front Climate Control Panel

1. Fan Control



Use this control panel to maintain aseparate temperature setting. Adjustthe direction of the airflow or adjustthe fan speed for the rear seatpassenger(s).

When the fan knob is in the AUXposition, the rear climate controlpanel can be used to adjust theclimate settings in the rearseating area.



Rear Climate Control Panel

1. Fan Control



For vehicles with a rear climatecontrol panel, it is located overheadbehind the driver and frontpassenger, centered in front of thesecond row. To adjust the rearclimate control panel settings by arear seat passenger, the frontclimate control panel fan knob must

be in the AUX position. The fanspeed, air delivery mode, andtemperature can then be adjusted.

AUX (Auxiliary): Turn the fan knobon the front climate control panel toAUX to let rear seat passengers usethe control panel in the rear seatingarea. This disables the front controlpanel. To return control to the frontpanel, move the fan knob outof AUX.

9 : Turns the system off.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed in therear-seating area.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature in therear-seating area.

The air-conditioning system on themain climate control panel must beturned on to direct cooled air to therear of the vehicle. If it is not on,then the temperature in the rear ofthe vehicle remains at cabintemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflow inthe rear seating area.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theupper outlets, with some directed tothe floor outlets.



2 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

Be sure to keep the area under thefront seats clear of any objects sothat the air inside of the vehicle cancirculate effectively.

For information on how to use themain climate control system, seeClimate Control Systems onpage 8‑1. For information onventilation, see Air Vents onpage 8‑7.

Air VentsUse the outlets located near thecenter and on the sides of theinstrument panel to change thedirection of airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow or

leaves from the air inlets at thebase of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-5Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-6Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission(Six Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Automatic Transmission(Four Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Ride Control SystemsStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-32Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-37Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-42Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-42California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-43Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-44Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46


9-2 Driving and Operating

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑8.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to be

careless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.



Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Hydraulic Power Steering

Your vehicle has hydraulic powersteering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid on page 10‑22.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops orbecause of a system malfunction,the vehicle can be steered but mayrequired increased effort. See yourdealer if there is a problem.

If the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery



The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.

. Steering or CorneringSkid — too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or other

material on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.



{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑43.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.



. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot that

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.Steering may also be affectedwhen ignition is off. You couldcrash. Always have the enginerunning and the vehicle in gearwhen going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.



The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑30 improves vehiclestability during hard stops on aslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe and/or thefuel operated heater exhaustsystem, if equipped. If thevehicle has a diesel engineand a fuel operated heater,see “Fuel Operated Heater(FOH)” in the diesel enginesupplement.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when you

feel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑32.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.



Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑80.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver dooropen, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost (striker). The tire andloading information label showsthe number of occupant seating



positions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (3) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10‑43 and Tire Pressureon page 10‑52.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axle. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle. See TrailerTowing on page 9‑49 forimportant information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.



Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

3. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)

Example 2

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3

1. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 3 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)



Refer to the vehicle tire andloading information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the rearedge of the driver door. Thelabel shows the size of the

vehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof the vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out theload equally on both sides of thecenterline.

Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If there is a heavy load, it shouldbe spread out.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.



{ WARNING

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

Add-On Equipment

When you carry removableitems, you may need to put alimit on how many people youcarry inside the vehicle. Be sureto weigh the vehicle before youbuy and install the newequipment.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500miles).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this



breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9‑49 for the trailertowing capabilities of thevehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brakepedal applied.

1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑19.

This position locks the ignition andtransmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑31.



{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is theposition in which you can operatethings like the radio and thewindshield wipers when the engineis off.

3 (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

4 (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.

Starting the EngineIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To place the transmission in theproper gear:

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as your engine getswarm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.



Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch to theACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.

When the Low Fuel warninglamp is on and the FUEL LEVELLOW message is displayed inthe Driver Information Center(DIC), the Computer-ControlledCranking System is disabled toprevent possible vehiclecomponent damage. When thishappens, hold the ignition switchin the START position tocontinue engine cranking.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5-10 seconds, especially in verycold weather (below −18°C or0°F), it could be flooded with toomuch gasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START for

up to 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the samething. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9‑57.



Fast Idle SystemIf equipped, this feature is availableonly with cruise control. The manualfast idle switch is operated using thecruise control buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel.

This system can be used toincrease engine idle speedwhenever the following conditionsare met:. The parking brake is set.. The brake pedal is not pressed.. The vehicle must not be moving

and the accelerator must not bepressed.

To control the fast idle:. To enable the Fast Idle System,

press and release the cruisecontrol on/off button and ensurethat the switch indicator lightis lit.

. Press and release the cruisecontrol SET button. Enginespeed will be held atapproximately 1200 rpm.

When the fast idle is active, theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay FAST IDLE ON.

One of the following actions will turnoff the fast idle:. Pressing the brake.. Selecting the cruise control

cancel button.. Releasing the parking brake.. Moving transmission shift lever

out of P (Park) or N (Neutral).. Selecting the cruise control on/

off button when it waspreviously on.

. Pressing the cruise control SETbutton a second time.

. Pressing the accelerator morethan one–quarter of theway down.

. Turning the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

Engine HeaterIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

The engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during engine warm‐up in cold weather conditions at orbelow −18°C (0°F). Vehicles with anengine coolant heater should beplugged in at least four hours beforestarting. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord may existwhich will prevent engine coolantheater operation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.



2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

The cord for the engine coolantheater is located on the driverside of the engine compartmentand is attached to the hose forthe power steering reservoir.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine partsand prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows (if equipped)

These features will work when theignition key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,power to the radio and powerwindows will continue to work10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

Shifting Into Park1. Hold the brake pedal down, then

set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑19. If you are towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑47.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set. After theshift lever is moved into P (Park),hold the regular brake pedal down.

Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) withoutfirst pulling it toward you. If you can,it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle can put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. It might be difficult topull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park on page 9‑19.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforereleasing the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mightneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawl

in the transmission. Then youshould be able to pull the shift leverout of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThe vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to fully apply thebrakes before you can shift fromP (Park) when the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. SeeAutomatic Transmission (Six Speed)on page 9‑22 or AutomaticTransmission (Four Speed) onpage 9‑26.

The shift lock control system isdesigned to do the following:. Prevent the ignition key from

being removed unless the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal is applied.



The shift lock control system isalways functional except in the caseof a dead battery or low voltage(less than 9 V) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑77 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park) use thefollowing:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the shift lever all theway into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, have the vehicle serviced.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9‑19and Engine Exhaust on page 9‑21.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑47.

AutomaticTransmission

Automatic Transmission(Six Speed)Vehicles with a six speed automatictransmission have a shift positionindicator within the instrumentcluster.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode on page 9‑28.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily. When parked on a hill,



especially when the vehicle has aheavy load, you might notice anincrease in the effort to shift out ofP (Park). See “Torque Lock” underShifting Into Park on page 9‑19 formore information.

{ WARNING


Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑19 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 9‑47.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use N (Neutral)only. Also, use N (Neutral) when thevehicle is being towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

firmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.



. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

D (Drive) can be used when towinga trailer, carrying a heavy load ordriving on steep hills. You mightwant to shift the transmission to alower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑5.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.

If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. Adaptive shift controlscontinually compares key shiftparameters to pre-programmedideal shifts stored in thetransmissions computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when temperaturechanges. During this adaptive shiftcontrol process, shifting might feeldifferent as the transmissiondetermines the best settings.

The shift quality of a new vehiclemay not be ideal because theAdaptive Shift Control process maynot have determined the best

settings for a particular shift orcondition. Shift quality will improvewith continued driving.

When temperatures are very cold,the transmission's gear shiftingcould be delayed providing morestable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeablewith a cold transmission. Thisdifference in shifting is normal.

M (Manual Mode): This positionlets drivers select the range of gearsappropriate for current drivingconditions. If the vehicle has thisfeature, see “Range SelectionMode” under Manual Mode onpage 9‑28.

3 (Third): This position is also usedfor normal driving. It reduces vehiclespeed more than D (Drive) withoutusing the brakes. You might choose3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) whendriving on hilly, winding roads, whentowing a trailer, so there is lessshifting between gears and when



going down a steep hill. See “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode on page 9‑28.

2 (Second): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than3 (Third) without using the brakes.You can use 2 (Second) on hills.It can help control vehicle speed asyou go down steep mountain roads,but then you would also want to usethe brakes off and on. See “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode on page 9‑28.

If you manually select 2 (Second) inan automatic transmission, thetransmission will start insecond gear. You can use thisfeature for reducing the speed of therear wheels when you are trying tostart the vehicle from a stop onslippery road surfaces.

1 (First): This position reducesvehicle speed without using thebrakes. You can use it for major/severe downgrades where thevehicle would otherwise acceleratedue to steepness of grade. When

you shift to 1 (First) it provides thelowest gear appropriate to currentroad speed and continues todownshift as the vehicle slows,eventually downshifting to 1 (First)gear. The transmission can be heldin 1 (First) gear using RangeSelection Mode or the shift lever.See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode on page 9‑28.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in one placeon a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.

Normal Mode Grade Braking

Vehicles with a 6-Speed automatictransmission have Normal ModeGrade Braking that is enabled whenthe vehicle is started, but is notenabled in Range Selection Mode.

It assists in maintaining desiredvehicle speeds when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle. The first time the systemactivates for each ignition key cycle,a DIC message will be displayed.See Transmission Messages onpage 5‑37.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forthree seconds. A DIC messagedisplays. See TransmissionMessages on page 5‑37.

For other forms of grade braking,see Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑29and Cruise Control on page 9‑34.



Automatic Transmission(Four Speed)

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING


(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑19 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 9‑47.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must first press thebrake pedal before you can shiftfrom P (Park) with the ignition inON/RUN.

If you cannot shift out of P (Park),ease pressure on the shift lever andpush the shift lever all the way intoP (Park) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then move the shiftlever into another gear. See Shiftingout of Park on page 9‑20.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.



{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

You will shift down to the nextgear and have more power.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑5.

3 (Third): This position is also usedfor normal driving. However itreduces vehicle speed more thanD (Drive) without using the brakes.You might choose 3 (Third) insteadof D (Drive) when driving on hilly,winding roads, when towing a trailer,so there is less shifting betweengears and when going down asteep hill.

You should use 3 (Third) (or a lowergear as needed) when towing atrailer to minimize heat build-up andextend the life of the transmission.

2 (Second): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than3 (Third) without using the brakes.You can use 2 (Second) on hills.It can help control vehicle speed asyou go down steep mountain roads,but then you would also want to usethe brakes off and on.

You may use this feature forreducing torque to the rear wheelswhen you are trying to start thevehicle from a stop on slippery roadsurfaces.

1 (First): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than2 (Second) without using the brakes.You can use it on very steep hills,or in deep snow or mud. If the shiftlever is put in 1 (First) while thevehicle is moving forward, thetransmission will not shift into firstgear until the vehicle is going slowlyenough.




Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

The vehicle may have a RangeSelection Mode. The RangeSelection Mode helps control thevehicle's transmission and vehiclespeed while driving down hill ortowing a trailer by letting you selecta desired range of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the +/− buttons on theshift lever, to select the desiredrange of gears for current drivingconditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selecteda number displays in the DIC next tothe M indicating the current gear.

This number is the highest gear thatcan be used. However, the vehiclecan automatically shift to lowergears as it adjusts to drivingconditions. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle,but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used untilthe +/− button located on thesteering column lever is used tochange to the gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑29.

While using Range Selection Mode,Cruise Control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.


Low Traction Mode

Low Traction Mode can assist invehicle acceleration when roadconditions are slippery. While thevehicle is at a stop, select thesecond gear range using RangeSelection Mode. This will limittorque to the wheels after it detectswheel slip, preventing the tires fromspinning.



Tow/Haul Mode

Vehicles with an automatictransmission have a Tow/HaulMode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjuststhe transmission shift pattern toreduce shift cycling, providingincreased performance, vehiclecontrol, and transmission coolingwhen towing or hauling heavy loads.

Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and offby pressing the button on theinstrument panel. When Tow/Haul ison, a light on the instrument clusterwill come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light onpage 5‑21 for more information.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment on page 9‑54.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking(6-Speed AutomaticTransmission)

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking isonly enabled while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and the vehicle isnot in the Range Selection Mode.See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode onpage 9‑28. Tow/Haul Mode GradeBraking assists in maintainingdesired vehicle speeds when drivingon downhill grades by using theengine and transmission to slow thevehicle.

To disable or enable Tow/HaulGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forthree seconds. A DIC message willbe displayed. See TransmissionMessages on page 5‑37.

See Towing Equipment onpage 9‑54.

For other forms of grade braking,see Automatic Transmission (SixSpeed) on page 9‑22 or AutomaticTransmission (Four Speed) onpage 9‑26 and Cruise Control onpage 9‑34.



Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has this feature,engine power is sent to all fourwheels when extra traction isneeded. This is like four-wheeldrive, but there is no separate leveror switch to engage or disengagethe front axle. It is fully automatic,and adjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑21.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle



suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal, then pushdown the parking brake pedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down. Pullthe handle, located just above theparking brake pedal, with theparking brake symbol, to release theparking brake.

If the ignition is on when the parkingbrake is released, the brake systemwarning light will go off.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑47.



Ride Control Systems

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle may have a vehiclestability enhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists the driver with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to assist thedriver with keeping the vehicle onthe intended path.

When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto ensure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle. The

system should initialize before thevehicle reaches 40 km/h (25 mph).In some cases, it may takeapproximately 3.2 km (2 mi) ofdriving before the system initializes.

The Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak indicator light comes onin the instrument cluster when thesystem requires service.

When StabiliTrak activates, theTCS/StabiliTrak indicator lightflashes in the instrument cluster.This also occurs when TCS isactivated.

See Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑22.

For your safety, the system can onlybe disabled when the vehicle speedis less than 40 km/h (25 mph).

Press the StabiliTrak button on theinstrument panel once to turn off theTraction Control System (TCS). Theappropriate message is displayed inthe DIC.

Press and hold the StabiliTrakbutton to turn off StabiliTrak andTCS. The StabiliTrak Off light



illuminates and the appropriatemessages will be displayed inthe DIC.

To turn StabiliTrak and TCS backon, press the StabiliTrak buttonagain. StabiliTrak will automaticallyturn back on when the vehiclespeed exceeds 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the StabiliTrak system hasbeen turned off, system noises maystill be heard as a result of thebrake-traction control coming on.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. See If the VehicleIs Stuck on page 9‑9.

StabiliTrak System Operation

The StabiliTrak system is normallyon, except when the system isinitializing or has been disabled withthe StabiliTrak button. TheStabiliTrak system will automatically

activate to assist the driver inmaintaining vehicle directionalcontrol in most driving conditions.When activated, the StabiliTraksystem may reduce engine power tothe wheels and apply braking toindividual wheels as necessary toassist the driver with vehicledirectional control. If cruise controlis being used when StabiliTrakactivates, the cruise controlautomatically disengages. Thecruise control can be re-engagedwhen road conditions allow. SeeCruise Control on page 9‑34.

The StabiliTrak system may alsoturn off automatically if it determinesthat a problem exists with thesystem. If the problem does notclear itself after restarting thevehicle, see your dealer for service.

Traction Control Operation

TCS is part of the StabiliTraksystem. TCS limits wheel spin byreducing engine power to thewheels and by applying brakes toeach individual wheel as necessary.

If the brake-traction control systemactivates constantly or if the brakeshave heated up due to high speedbraking, the brake-traction controlwill be automatically disabled. Thesystem will come back on after thebrakes have cooled. This can takeup to two minutes or longerdepending on brake usage.

TCS may activate on dry or roughroads or under conditions such asheavy acceleration while turning orabrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this reduction inacceleration occurs, it may benoticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.



Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Cruise Control

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

For vehicles with cruise control, aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 40 km/h(25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol is turned off.

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and thesystem begins to limit wheel spin,cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑32. When road conditionsallow the cruise control to be safelyused again, it can be turnedback on.

I (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on or off. The indicator lightis on when cruise control is on andturns off when cruise control is off.



+RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.

SET− (Set/Coast): Press to set thespeed and activate cruise control orpress and hold to decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument cluster comes on afterthe cruise control has been set tothe desired speed.

1. Press theI button.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET− button on thesteering wheel and release it.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press the +RES button on thesteering wheel. The vehicle returnsto the previous set speed and staysthere.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall amounts, press the +RESbutton. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the SET– button on thesteering wheel briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.



Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends on the vehiclespeed, the load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, pressing the accelerator pedalmay be necessary to maintainvehicle speed.

While going downhill:. Vehicles with a four speed

automatic transmission mayneed to have the brakes appliedor the transmission shifted to alower gear to help maintaindriver selected speed.

. Vehicles with a six speedautomatic transmission haveCruise Grade Braking to helpmaintain driver selected speed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabledwhen the vehicle is started andCruise Control is active. It is notenabled in Range Selection Mode.It assists in maintaining driverselected speed when driving on

downhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.

To disable and enable Cruise GradeBraking for the current ignition keycycle, press and hold the Tow/Haulbutton for three seconds. A DICmessage displays. SeeTransmission Messages onpage 5‑37.

When the brakes are manuallyapplied the cruise control isdisengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press the [ on the steeringwheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,pressI on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory ifI ispressed or if the vehicle isturned off.



Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).

{ WARNING

The URPA system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with URPA, alwayscheck the area around the vehicleand check all mirrors beforebacking.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The time between the beepsgets shorter as the vehicleapproaches the obstacle.A continuous tone is heard whenthe distance is less than30 cm (12 in).

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25 cm (10 in) off the groundand below rear door level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) fromthe rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.

Turning the System On and Off

The system can be disabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Park Assist” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑24.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer for repair.

PARK ASSIST OFF: This messageoccurs if the driver disables thesystem or if the vehicle is drivenabove 8 km/h (5 mph) inR (Reverse).



PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL: Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the rear bumperfree of mud, dirt, snow, ice,slush, and frost. The messagemay not clear until frost or icehas melted all around and insidethe sensor.

. A trailer is attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or an objecthanging out of the rear doorduring the current or last drivecycle. URPA will return to normaloperation after it is determinedthe object is removed. Thiscould take a few drive cycles.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

Other conditions may affect systemperformance, such as vibrationsfrom a jackhammer or thecompression of air brakes on a verylarge truck.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC) system displays part of thescene behind the vehicle.

{ WARNING

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectlocated outside the camera's fieldof view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Perceiveddistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not back thevehicle using only the RVCscreen, during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers,or where there could be crosstraffic. Failure to use proper carebefore backing may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Always check behind and aroundthe vehicle before backing.

Vehicles without NavigationSystem

The RVC system displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Whenthe vehicle is on and shifted intoR (Reverse) the video imageappears on the inside rearviewmirror. The video image disappearsafter the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse).

Vehicles with NavigationSystem

The RVC system is designed tohelp the driver when backing up bydisplaying a view of the area behindthe vehicle. When the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse), the videoimage appears on the navigationscreen. After a delay, the navigationscreen displays the last screen afterthe vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse).

Turning the RVC System On or Off

To turn the RVC system on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).



2. Press MENU to enter theconfigure menu options. Turnthe Multifunction knob until theDisplay feature is highlightedand press the Multifunctionknob. Or press the Displayscreen button

3. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen displays.

4. Select the Video screen button.When the Video screen button ishighlighted the RVCsystem is on.

The delay that is received aftershifting out of R (Reverse) isapproximately 10 seconds. Thedelay can be canceled byperforming one of the following:. Pressing a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shifting into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

Symbols

The navigation system may have afeature that allows for viewingparking assist symbols on thenavigation screen while using theRVC. The Ultrasonic Rear ParkAssist (URPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.If URPA has been disabled and thesymbols have been turned on, theRear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable error message maydisplay. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑37.

The symbols appear near objectsdetected by the URPA system. Thesymbol may cover the object whenviewing the navigation screen.

To turn the symbols on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.


3. Press MENU to enter theconfigure menu options. Turnthe Multifunction knob until theDisplay feature is highlighted

and press the Multifunctionknob. Or press the Displayscreen button


5. Touch the Symbols screenbutton. The screen button will behighlighted when on.

Guidelines

The RVC system may have aguideline overlay that can help thedriver align the vehicle whenbacking into a parking spot.

To turn the guidelines on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.


3. Press MENU to enter theconfigure menu options. Turnthe Multifunction knob until theDisplay feature is highlightedand press the Multifunctionknob. Or press the Displayscreen button




5. Touch the Guidelines screenbutton. The screen button will behighlighted when on.

RVC Location

The camera is above the licenseplate.

This shows the field of view that thecamera provides.

1. View displayed by the camera

1. View displayed by the camera

2. Corners of the rear bumper

Displayed images may be further orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objectswhich are close to either corner ofthe bumper or under the bumper donot display.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system might not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the RVC System On orOff” earlier in this section.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlamps is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the camera



can change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

The RVC system display in therearview mirror may turn off or notappear as expected due to one ofthe following conditions. If thisoccurs the left indicator light on themirror will flash.. A slow flash may indicate a loss

of video signal, or no videosignal present during the reversecycle.

. A fast flash may indicate that thedisplay has been on for themaximum allowable time duringa reverse cycle, or the displayhas reached an OverTemperature limit.

The fast flash conditions areused to protect the video devicefrom high temperatureconditions. Once conditions

return to normal the device willreset and the green indicator willstop flashing.

During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will flash while the vehicleis in R (Reverse) or until theconditions return to normal.

FuelFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in theDuramax diesel supplement.

For Vehicles with gasoline engines,please read this.

Gasoline

Use of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com. TOP TIERgasoline is only available in the U.S.and Canada.



Vehicles that have a yellow fuel capcan use either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85%Ethanol) on page 9‑44. For all othervehicles, use only the unleadedgasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑42.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.

If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviousely described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inflex fuel vehicles.

{ CAUTION

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines with MMT as they canreduce spark plug life and affectemission control systemperformance. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, see your dealer for service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑43.



California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑17. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, or any other fuel notrecommended. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.

Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might be



available in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reduce

spark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a yellow fuel capcan use either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑42.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.

Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuelswebsite (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help youfind E85 fuel. Those stations that do

have E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do notuse the fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798 orCGSB Specification 3.512. Fillingthe tank with fuel mixtures that donot meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on. As theoutside temperature approachesfreezing, ethanol fuel distributorsshould supply winter grade ethanol,the same as with unleadedgasoline.

It is best not to alternate repeatedlybetween gasoline and E85. If youdo switch fuels, it is recommendedthat you add as much fuel aspossible — do not add less than11 L (3 gal) when refueling. Youshould drive the vehicle immediatelyafter refueling for at least 11 km(7 mi) to allow the vehicle to adaptto the change in ethanolconcentration.



E85 has less energy per liter(gallon) than gasoline, so you willneed to refill the fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than whenyou are using gasoline. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑45.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle.

If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability,the fuel cap will be yellow and statethat E85 or gasoline can be used.See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑44.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.



Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑83.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑17.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuelcap, be sure to get the right type.Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it maynot fit properly. This may causethe malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑17.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.



Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑80.For towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle such as a motorhome, see Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10‑80.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:. Become familiar with the state

and local laws that apply totrailer towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

{ WARNING

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See “Climate Control System”in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start the



combination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerate asquickly and is longer so it isnecessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand to

the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentcluster will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might get hot and no longerwork well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

The Tow/Haul Mode may be used ifthe transmission shifts too often.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑29.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)



for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑20.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3. Things that are

especially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could be

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

seriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by the vehiclewarranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” that appearslater in this section.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.

See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers,and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

G1500 Cargo Van 2WD

4.3LV6 3.42 1 950 kg (4,300 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)

5.3LV8 3.423.73

3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)

H1500 Cargo Van AWD

5.3LV8 3.42 2 948 kg (6,500 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)

G1500 Passenger Van 2WD

5.3LV8 3.423.73

2 812 kg (6,200 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)

H1500 Passenger Van AWD

5.3LV8 3.423.73

2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)

G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 266 kg (7,200 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 445 kg (9,800 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 221 kg (7,100 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

6.0LV8 3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

6.0LV8 3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

*The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.



Ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13‑3 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers, or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10for more information about thevehicle's maximum load capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (1) shouldbe 10 percent to 15 percent of thetotal loaded trailer weight (2), up to amaximum of 181 kg (400 lbs) with aweight carrying hitch. The trailertongue weight (1) should be10 percent to 15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (2), up to amaximum of 454 kg (1,000 lbs) witha weight distributing hitch.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitch

ball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.



Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle tires are inflatedto the upper limit for cold tires.These numbers can be found on theCertification label at the rear edge ofthe driver door, or see Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10. Make sure notto go over the GVW limit for thevehicle, or the GAWR, including theweight of the trailer tongue. If usinga weight distributing hitch, makesure not to go over the rear axlelimit before applying the weightdistribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch isneeded.

Weight-Distributing Hitchesand Weight Carrying Hitches

1. Body to Ground Distance

2. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the hitch must be adjusted sothe distance (1) remains the sameboth before and after coupling thetrailer to the tow vehicle.

If a step-bumper hitch will be used,the bumper could be damaged insharp turns. Make sure there

is ample room when turning to avoidcontact between the trailer and thebumper.

If the loaded trailer being pulled willweigh more than 2 270 kg(5,000 lbs), be sure to use aproperly mounted weight-distributinghitch and sway control of the propersize. This equipment is veryimportant for proper vehicle loadingand good handling when driving.Always use a sway control if thetrailer will weigh more than theselimits. Ask a hitch dealer about swaycontrols.

Will any holes need to be made inthe body of the vehicle when atrailer hitch is installed?

If using the wiring provided with thefactory-installed trailering package,no holes need to be made in thebody of the vehicle. However, if anaftermarket hitch is installed, holesmay need to be made in the body.

If holes are made in the body, thenbe sure to seal the holes later whenthe hitch is removed. If the holes are



not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide(CO) from the engine's exhaust canget into the vehicle as well as dirtand water. See “Carbon Monoxide”under Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑21.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 680 kg (1,500 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The optional heavy-duty trailerwiring package includes a wiringharness, with a seven-pin connectorat the rear of the vehicle and afour-wire harness assembly underthe driver side of the instrumentpanel. The four-wire harnessassembly comes without aconnector.

If the vehicle does not have a trailerhitch, the seven-wire harnessassembly with connector is tapedtogether and located in a framepocket at the driver side rear leftcorner of the frame.

If the vehicle has a trailer hitch, theseven-wire harness assembly withconnector is attached to a bracketon the hitch platform. In both cases,the seven-wire harness has aconnector and includes a 30-ampfeed wire.

The seven-wire harness connectorcontains the following trailer circuits:. Light Green: Back-up Lamps

(10A fuse)**. White: Ground. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal. Dark Green: Right Rear Stop

and Turn Signal*. Red/Black Stripe: Battery Feed

(30A Fuse). Brown: Trailer Park Lamp

Supply Voltage (15A fuse)**. Yellow: Left Rear Stop and Turn

Signal *

The four-wire harness (withoutconnector) contains the followingcircuits:. Black: Ground. Red/White: Battery Feed. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal. Light Blue: CHMSL/Stoplamp

Supply Voltage



* If the vehicle is a cutaway withtrailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse willbe shared for both left/stop trailerturn and right/stop trailer turnsignals. However, the cutawaylighting connector will have a10 amp fuse for each signal.

** If the vehicle is a cutaway withtrailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse willbe shared for trailer park lamps andcutaway rear lighting connector parklamps. Also, a 10 amp fuse will beshared for trailer back-up lamps andcutaway rear lighting connectorback-up lamps.

Tow/Haul Mode

This button is on the instrumentpanel, to the right of the steeringwheel.

Pressing this button turns on and offthe Tow/Haul Mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑29.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” in TrailerTowing on page 9‑49. Tow/Haul ismost useful under the followingdriving conditions:. When pulling a heavy trailer or a

large or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in stop andgo traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded may resultin unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Some electricalequipment can damage thevehicle or cause components tonot work and would not becovered by the warranty. Alwayscheck with your dealer beforeadding electrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑30 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑31.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-8Automatic Transmission Fluid(4-Speed Transmission) . . . . 10-9

Automatic Transmission Fluid(6-Speed Transmission) . . . 10-11

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-22Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-28Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-29Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-30

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-35

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-36Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Floor Console FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-45Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52


10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-59When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Secondary Latch System . . . 10-74Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-76

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-80Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition 65WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to


Vehicle Care 10-3

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑31.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑11.


10-4 Vehicle Care

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑30.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑15.

Notice: Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact thefluids, reservoir caps,or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is in front of the driverside door frame near the floor.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle andlift up the secondary hoodrelease, which is underneath themiddle of the hood.

3. Lift the hood, release the hoodprop from its retainer, and putthe hood prop into the slot inthe hood.

If the vehicle has an underhoodlamp, it will automatically come onand stay on until the hood is closed.

Before closing the hood, be sure allof the filler caps are on properly.Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Removethe hood prop from the slot in thehood and return the prop to itsretainer. Let the hood down andclose it firmly.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Engine Compartment Overview

4.3L V6 Engine Shown (4.8L V8 Engine, 5.3L V8 Engine, and 6.0L V8 Engine Similar)


10-6 Vehicle Care

1. Battery on page 10‑26.

2. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10‑15.

3. Coolant Recovery Tank. SeeCooling System on page 10‑15.

4. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick. See “Checking theFluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid (4-SpeedTransmission) on page 10‑9 orAutomatic Transmission Fluid(6-Speed Transmission) onpage 10‑11.

5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10‑6.

6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑6.

7. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

8. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑22.

9. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brake Fluid onpage 10‑24.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

Engine OilFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Engine Oil” in the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑8.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.


Vehicle Care 10-7

Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ WARNING

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oil

of the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or rags

containing used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.


Vehicle Care 10-9

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5‑32.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal slowly threetimes within five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (4-SpeedTransmission)If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

A good time to check the automatictransmission fluid level is when theengine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 and be sureto use the transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can be alittle difficult, it may be decided tohave this done at the dealer.

If not taken to the dealer, be sure tofollow all the instructions here or afalse reading on the dipstick couldresult.

Notice: Too much or too littlefluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engine


10-10 Vehicle Care

parts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes beforechecking the transmission fluid levelif you have been driving:. When outside temperatures are

above 32°C (90°F).. At high speed for quite a while.. In heavy traffic — especially in

hot weather.. While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluidshould be at normal operatingtemperature, which is 82°C to 93°C(180°F to 200°F).

Get the vehicle warmed up bydriving about 24 km (15 mi) whenoutside temperatures are above10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third)

until the engine temperature gaugemoves and then remains steady for10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be madeafter the vehicle has been sitting foreight hours or more with the engineoff, but this is used only as areference. Let the engine run at idlefor five minutes if outsidetemperatures are 10°C (50°F) ormore. If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), the engine may have to idlelonger. Should the fluid level be lowduring this cold check, the fluid mustbe checked hot before adding fluid.Checking the fluid hot will give amore accurate reading of the fluidlevel.

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the engine running.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, position theshift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle forthree minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off theengine, use the steps that follow.

The transmission dipstick is nearthe center of the enginecompartment and will be labeledwith the graphic shown.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5.

1. Flip the handle up, pull out thedipstick, and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.


Vehicle Care 10-11

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds, then pull it backout again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the lower level. Thefluid level must be in the COLDarea for a cold check or in theHOT or cross-hatched area for ahot check. Be sure to keep thedipstick pointed down to get anaccurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 todetermine what kind of transmissionfluid to use.

Using a funnel, add fluid down thetransmission dipstick tube only afterchecking the transmission fluidwhile it is hot. A cold check is usedonly as a reference. If the fluid levelis low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level up tothe HOT area for a hot check.It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Donot overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12.

. After adding fluid, recheck thefluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstick backin all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (6-SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. If a small leak issuspected, use the followingprocedures to check the fluid level.


10-12 Vehicle Care

However, if there is a large leak, itmay be necessary to have thevehicle towed to a dealer and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3, and be sureto use the transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can bedifficult, it is recommended to havethis check done at your dealer,which can monitor the transmissiontemperature. The transmission fluidlevel increases with temperature. Toobtain a highly accurate fluid levelcheck, the transmission temperaturemust be measured.

If it is decided to check the fluidlevel, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or a false readingon the dipstick may occur.

Notice: Too much or too littlefluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes with theengine off, before checking thetransmission fluid level if the vehiclehas been driven:. In hot weather, when outside

temperatures are above 32°C(90°F).

. The vehicle is heavily loaded.

. At high speed for quite a while inhot weather.

. In heavy traffic and hot weather.

. While pulling a trailer.

After driving under these conditions,a hot check can be performed. Thefluid should be hot, which is 71°C to93°C (160°F to 200°F).

A cold fluid level check can beperformed after the vehicle hasbeen sitting for eight hours or morewith the engine off, but this is usedonly as a reference. Let the enginerun at idle for five minutes if theoutside temperature is between15°C to 32°C (60°F to 90°F). Shouldthe fluid level be low during this coldcheck, the fluid must be checkedwarm or hot before adding fluid.If the outside temperature is colderthan 15°C (60°F) or hotter than32°C (90°F), a cold check cannot beperformed.

A warm fluid level check can beperformed by driving the vehicleunder lightly loaded conditions andoutside temperatures between 10°Cto 27°C (50°F to 80°F). The vehicleshould be driven for at least 24 km(15 mi) before performing a warmcheck. Checking the fluid warm or


Vehicle Care 10-13

hot will give a more accuratereading of the fluid level than a coldcheck.

Because the vehicle is equippedwith a high-efficiency air-to-oilcooler, the transmission fluidtemperature may not reach therequired hot fluid level checkingtemperature under normal lightlyloaded driving vehicle conditions.

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare the vehicle:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the engine running.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With a foot on the brake pedal,move the shift lever througheach gear range, pausing forabout three seconds in eachrange. When M is reached,move the selector from M1through M3. Then, position theshift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle fortwo minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off theengine, use the steps that follow.

The transmission dipstick is nearthe center of the enginecompartment and will be labeledwith the graphic shown.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5 for more informationon location.

1. COLD Range

2. WARM Range

3. HOT Range

1. Flip the handle up, pull out thedipstick, and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and pull it backout again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the lower level. Thefluid level must be in theCOLD (1) range for a coldcheck, transmission temperature27°C to 32°C (80°F to 90°F);between the COLD (1) andHOT (3) range for a WARM (2)check, 50°C to 60°C (122°F to140°F); or in the HOT (3)cross-hatched range for a hotcheck, 71°C to 93°C (160°F to200°F). Be sure to keep thedipstick pointed down to get anaccurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.


10-14 Vehicle Care

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 todetermine what kind of transmissionfluid to use.

1. WARM Range

2. HOT Range

Using a funnel, add fluid down thetransmission dipstick tube only afterchecking the transmission fluidwhile it is warm or hot. A cold checkis used only as a reference. If thefluid level is low, add only enough ofthe proper fluid to bring the level upto the middle of the WARM (1) orHOT (2) range depending on theambient temperature and priordriving conditions. Refer to “How toCheck Automatic Transmission

Fluid” earlier in this section forinstructions on driving to achievewarm or hot transmission fluid.It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Donot overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12.. After adding fluid, recheck the

fluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstick backin all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is nearthe center of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑5.


Vehicle Care 10-15

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter at the scheduled maintenanceintervals. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3. If driving industy/dirty conditions, inspect thefilter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake it to release loosedust and dirt. If the filter remainscovered with dirt, a new filter isrequired. Never use compressed airto clean the filter.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Unhook the retainer clips andremove the cover.

2. Lift the filter out of the engine aircleaner/filter housing. Careshould be taken to dislodge aslittle dirt as possible.

3. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter housing.

4. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter. Make sure that thefilter fits properly into thehousing.

5. Reinstall the cover and fastenthe retaining clips.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

4.3L V6 Engine Shown (4.8LV8 Engine, 5.3L V8 Engine,and 6.0L V8 Engine Similar)

1. Radiator Pressure Cap

2. Coolant Recovery Tank

3. Engine Cooling Fan(Out of View)


10-16 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fan canstart even when the engine is notrunning. To avoid injury, alwayskeep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any enginecooling fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Usea 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If improper coolantmixture, inhibitors, or additivesare used in the vehicle coolingsystem, the engine couldoverheat and be damaged. Toomuch water in the mixture canfreeze and crack engine coolingparts. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Use onlythe proper mixture of engine

coolant for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the COLD FILL mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at the

coolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system is cool beforethis is done.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at or above theCOLD FILL mark. If it is not, therecould be a leak in the coolingsystem.

If the coolant is low, add the coolantor take the vehicle to a dealer forservice.


10-18 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank for GasolineEngines

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

1. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the radiator pressurecap and upper radiator hose, isno longer hot. Turn the pressurecap slowly counterclockwiseuntil it first stops. Do not pressdown while turning thepressure cap.

If a hiss is heard, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure cap,but now push down as you turnit. Remove the pressure cap.


Vehicle Care 10-19

3. Fill the radiator with the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture, upto the base of the filler neck.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 formore information about theproper coolant mixture.

4. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe COLD FILL mark.

5. Reinstall the cap back on thecoolant recovery tank, but leavethe radiator pressure cap off.

6. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hose canbe felt getting hot. Watch out forthe engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant levelinside the radiator filler neckmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixturethrough the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of thefiller neck.


10-20 Vehicle Care

8. Replace the pressure cap. Atany time during this procedure ifcoolant begins to flow out of thefiller neck, reinstall thepressure cap.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

The vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on the vehicle'sinstrument cluster. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑12.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,but instead get service help rightaway, see Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑5.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, the fanshould be running. If it is not, do notcontinue to run the engine and havethe vehicle serviced.

See if the engine cooling fan speedincreases when idle speed isdoubled by pushing the acceleratorpedal down. If it does not, thevehicle needs service. Turn off theengine.

Notice: Running the enginewithout coolant may causedamage or a fire. Vehicle damagewould not be covered by thewarranty.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.


Vehicle Care 10-21

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer. See “Driving on

Grades” under Trailer Towing onpage 9‑49.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off the

road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in the overheatzone or an overheat warning nolonger displays, the vehicle can bedriven. Continue to drive the vehicleslowly for about 10 minutes. Keep asafe vehicle distance from thevehicle in front. If the warning doesnot come back on, continue to drivenormally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam,push down the accelerator until theengine speed is about twice as fastas normal idle speed for at leastthree minutes while parked. If thewarning is still on, turn off theengine until it cools down.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood, get service help right away.

Engine FanThe vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan. When the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the fan is spinning slower and theclutch is not fully engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing, and/or highoutside temperatures, the fan speedincreases as the clutch more fullyengages, so an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or makingextra shifts. It is merely the coolingsystem functioning properly. The fanwill slow down when additionalcooling is not required and theclutch partially disengages.

This fan noise may be heard whenstarting the engine. It will go awayas the fan clutch partiallydisengages.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir isin the engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the COLDFILL mark. If necessary, add onlyenough fluid to bring the level up tothe mark.

To prevent contamination of brakefluid, never check or fill the powersteering reservoir with the brakemaster cylinder cover off.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12. Alwaysuse the proper fluid. Failure to usethe proper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.


Vehicle Care 10-23

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.

If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.


Vehicle Care 10-25

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and/or fueloperated heater parts,if equipped. If the vehicle has adiesel engine and a fuel operatedheater, see “Fuel OperatedHeater (FOH)” in the dieselengine supplement. The fluid willburn if the engine is hot enough.You or others could be burned,and the vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brakehydraulic system. See “CheckingBrake Fluid” in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑5.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above the MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brake


10-26 Vehicle Care

hydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for battery location.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicals

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

known to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑77 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

1. Drain Plug


Vehicle Care 10-27

2. Fill Plug

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, on the transfercase, some lubricant will need to beadded. Add enough lubricant toraise the level to the bottom of thefill plug hole. Use care not toovertighten the plug.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 todetermine what kind of lubricantto use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant and when to change it.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.



If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, some lubricantmay need to be added.

When the differential is cold, addenough lubricant to raise the level to10 mm (3/8 in) below the fillplug hole.

When the differential is at operatingtemperature (warm), add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug hole.

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑3 to determine howoften to check the lubricant.


10-28 Vehicle Care



If you have the 1500 Series, theproper level is from 15mm (5/8 in) to40 mm (1 5/8 in) below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole. The proper levelfor the 2500 and 3500 Series isfrom 0 to 6 mm (1/4 in) below thebottom of the fill plug hole. Add onlyenough fluid to reach the properlevel.

What to Use


Noise Control SystemThe following information relates tocompliance with federal noiseemission standards for vehicles witha Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg(10,000 lbs). The MaintenanceSchedule provides information onmaintaining the noise control systemto minimize degradation of the noiseemission control system during thelife of the vehicle. The noise controlsystem warranty is given in thevehicle warranty booklet.

These standards apply only tovehicles sold in the United States.

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person, otherthan for purposes ofmaintenance, repair orreplacement, of any device orelement of design incorporatedinto any new vehicle for thepurpose of noise control, prior toits sale or delivery to the ultimatepurchaser or while it is in use; or

2. The use of the vehicle after suchdevice or element of design hasbeen removed or renderedinoperative by any person.

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.

Insulation:. Removal of the noise shields or

any underhood insulation.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Engine:. Removal or rendering engine

speed governor, if the vehiclehas one, inoperative so as toallow engine speed to exceedmanufacturer specifications.

Fan and Drive:. Removal of fan clutch, if the

vehicle has one, or renderingclutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud, if thevehicle has one.

Air Intake:. Removal of the air cleaner

silencer.. Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:. Removal of the muffler and/or

resonator.. Removal of the exhaust pipes

and exhaust pipe clamps.

Fuel Operated Heater(FOH) — Diesel Engine:. Removal of the muffler.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑31.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.


10-30 Vehicle Care

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑31.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove foot

pressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑14.

Notice: Allowing the wiper arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Any


Vehicle Care 10-31

damage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑36.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.


10-32 Vehicle Care

Headlamps

Composite Headlamp

1. High-Beam Headlamp

2. Low-Beam Headlamp

To remove the headlamp assemblyfrom the vehicle and access thebulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

2. Remove the two bolts from theheadlamp assembly.

3. Lift the headlamp assembly torelease the lower tabs from theradiator support.

4. Turn the headlamp forward andupward to remove it from thegrille.

5. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

6. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseone-quarter turn to remove itfrom the headlamp assembly.

7. Install the new bulb into theheadlamp assembly and connectthe electrical connector.


Vehicle Care 10-33

8. Reverse the steps to reinstall theheadlamp assembly.

To prevent headlamp vibrationand shortened bulb life, be sureto insert the headlamp assemblytabs in the slots at the lowerportion of the housing.

Sealed-Beam Headlamp

1. Headlamp retainer screws

2. Headlamp retainer

3. Sealed-beam headlamp bulb

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the four screws (1) fromthe headlamp retainer (2).

Pull the retainer (2) out and set itaside.

2. Pull the bulb (3) forward to gainaccess to the electricalconnector.

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (2) and remove theheadlamp bulb (1).

4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstallthe headlamp.

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps

1. Front Parking and TurnSignal Lamp

2. Front Sidemarker Lamp

To replace the front turn signal,sidemarker, and/or parking lampbulb(s):


10-34 Vehicle Care

1. Use a small tool to unlatch theoutboard clip on the lamp bypushing inboard and prying thelamp assembly forward.

2. Remove the lamp from the grille.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise one-quarterturn and remove it from the lampassembly.

4. Remove the bulb from thesocket by pulling it straight out.

5. Replace the bulb.

6. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto reinstall it in the lampassembly.

7. Reinstall the lamp assembly intothe grille until the outboard clipsnaps into place.

TaillampsTo replace a taillamp/turn signallamp or back-up lamp bulb:

1. Remove the two inboard nutsfrom the inside of the taillampassembly.

2. The third nut (3) is under theapplique piece (2) above thelamp. Remove the two inboardapplique nuts. Pull theapplique (2) straight rearwardslightly to clear the studs. Thenrotate the applique (2) just farenough to gain access to theouter push pins (1).

3. Carefully disconnect the pushpins (1) from the appliquebracket.

4. Remove the third nut (3) fromthe upper outboard side ofthe lamp.


Vehicle Care 10-35

5. Remove the taillamp assemblyfrom the vehicle.

6. Remove the taillamp/turn signallamp (1) or back-up lamp (2)bulb socket by turning itcounterclockwise one-quarterturn and pulling it out of the lampassembly.

7. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

8. Push the new bulb into thesocket.

9. Reinstall the bulb socket byturning it clockwise into the lampassembly.

10. Reverse Steps 1–5 to reinstallthe taillamp assembly andapplique.

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)The CHMSL is above the rear doorsat the center of the vehicle.

To replace a bulb:

1. Remove the two screws from theCHMSL assembly.

2. Remove the CHMSL assembly.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise one-quarterturn to remove it from the lampassembly.

4. Pull the old bulb straight out ofthe socket and push the newbulb into the socket.

5. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseone-quarter turn to install it inthe lamp assembly.

6. Reinstall the CHMSL assemblyand two screws.

Do not block or damage the CHMSLwhen items are loaded on the roofof the vehicle.


10-36 Vehicle Care

License Plate Lamp

1. Bulb Socket

2. License Plate Bulb Assembly

3. Screws

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the screws (3) thatsecure the license plate bulbassembly (2).

2. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

3. Install the new bulb.

4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 toreinstall the license plate bulbassembly.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-up, RearParking, Stoplamp,and TurnSignal Lamp

3157KX

CenterHigh-MountedStoplamp(CHMSL)

912LL

Front Parking andTurn Signal Lamp

3157KX

FrontSidemarker Lamp

194LL

LicensePlate Lamp

194LL

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Headlamps

CompositeHigh-BeamHeadlamp

9005LL

CompositeLow-BeamHeadlamp

9006LL

Sealed BeamHeadlamp

H6054

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe fuse block is located in theengine compartment on the driverside of the vehicle.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


10-38 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Mini Fuse Usage

3 Right Stop/TurnTrailer

4 Spare

5 Spare

6 Fuel SystemControl ModuleIgnition

7 Body ControlModule 5



10 Instrument PanelCluster

11 Trailer Wiring

12 Inside Rear VisionCamera Module

13 Spare

14 Windshield Washer

16 Horn


Vehicle Care 10-39

Mini Fuse Usage

17 Transmission

18 Air ConditioningCompressor

19 Engine ControlModule Battery

20 Spare

21 Left Stop/TurnTrailer

22 Spare

23 Spare

24 Fuel Pump

25 Auxiliary PowerOutlet


27 Special EquipmentOption

28 Airbag

29 Steering WheelSensor

Mini Fuse Usage

30 Engine ControlModule Ignition/Glow Plug Module

31 TransmissionControl ModuleIgnition

32 TransmissionControl ModuleBattery

33 Rear Parking AidModule

34 Spare

35 Fuel OperatedHeater Module

36 Fuel SystemControl ModuleBattery

51 Left High-BeamHeadlamp

52 Right High-BeamHeadlamp

Mini Fuse Usage

53 Left Low-BeamHeadlamp

54 Right Low-BeamHeadlamp

55 Wiper

56 Canister VentSolenoid



61 Spare

62 Oxygen Sensor 2(Post), EV Fan(Diesel)

63 Spare

64 Mass Air Flow/Canister Vent

65 Odd Ignition/Injectors


10-40 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuse Usage

66 Daytime RunningLamps 2(LOLVL-V22)(If Equipped)

67 Daytime RunningLamps 1(UPLVL+V22)(If Equipped)

68 Auxiliary StopLamps

69 Trailer Stop Lamps

70 Spare

71 Fuel Heater/FlexFuel Sensor


73 Lighter/Data LinkConnection

75 V6 Fuel Injectors

76 Spare

77 OxygenSensor 2 (Pre)

Mini Fuse Usage

78 Engine ControlModule Powertrain

79 Even Ignition/Injectors

J-Case Fuse Usage

1 ABS Motor

2 ABS Module

41 Spare

42 Trailer Wiring

43 Fan High

44 Starter Solenoid

45 Engine ControlModule/Powertrain

46 Spare

47 Fan Lo

74 Front Blower

Relay Usage

15 Run/Crank

37 Spare

38 Fuel Pump

39 Crank

40 Air ConditioningCompressor

48 Fan High

49 Powertrain

50 Spare

57 Fan Low

60 Fan Control


Vehicle Care 10-41

Floor Console Fuse BlockThe floor console fuse block is under the driver seat.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Mini-Fuse Usage

F1 Empty

F2 Steering WheelSensor

F3 Auxiliary ParkingLamps (Cut-Away)

F4 Front Park Lamps

F5 Trailer Park Lamps

F6 Upfitter ParkLamps

F7 Right RearPark Lamp

F8 Left RearPark Lamp

F9 Outside RearviewMirror Switch

F10 Airbag/AutomaticOccupant Sensing

F11 OnStar®

(If Equipped)


10-42 Vehicle Care

Mini-Fuse Usage

F12 Empty

F13 Heating, Ventilationand AirConditioning 2

F14 Heating, Ventilationand AirConditioning 1

F15 Empty

F17 Outside RearviewMirror Heater

F18 Rear WindowDefogger

F19 Compass

F20 Radio/Chime/SiriusXM SatelliteRadio (If Equipped)

F21 Remote FunctionActuator/TirePressure Monitor

Mini-Fuse Usage

F22 Ignition Switch/Discrete LogicIgnitionSensor (PK3)

F23 Instrument Cluster

F25 Heating, Ventilationand AirConditioningControl

F26 Auxiliary/TrailerBackup

F27 Taillamps Backup

F30 Upfitter CourtesyLamps

F31 Front Door Lock

F32 Rear Door Lock

F33 Cargo Door Unlock

F34 Passenger DoorUnlock

F35 Rear PassengerDoor Unlock

Mini-Fuse Usage

F36 Driver Door Unlock

F37 Empty

F38 Empty

J-Case Fuse Usage

F16 Upfitter Auxiliary 1

F24 Empty

F28 Upfitter Auxiliary 2Reading Lamps

F29 Rear Blower

Relays Usage

K1 Run (High CurrentMicro)

K2 Empty (HighCurrent Micro)

K3 Park Lamps (HighCurrent Micro)

K4 Upfitter Auxiliary 2(High Current Mini)


Vehicle Care 10-43

Relays Usage

K5 Rear Defogger(High CurrentMicro)

K6 RetainedAccessory Power(RAP) (HighCurrent Micro)

CircuitBreaker

Usage

CB1 Power Seats

CB2 Power Windows

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)


10-44 Vehicle Care

WARNING (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10‑44.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not, originally,equipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on snow or ice-coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10‑60.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.


Vehicle Care 10-45

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will decreaseperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving in coldtemperatures or on snow or icecovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires on page 10‑44.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle and lighttruck tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Tire Size: The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first two


10-46 Vehicle Care

digits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading on page 10‑62.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑52 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Tire Size: The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance


Vehicle Care 10-47

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines. This does not applyto Goodyear LT225/75R16 G949RSA and Goodyear LT225/75R16 G933 RSD commercialtruck tires.

(3) Dual Tire Maximum Load:Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used in a dualconfiguration. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure on page 10‑52and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

(4) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with the

U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(5) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(6) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(7) Single Tire MaximumLoad: Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used as a single. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑52 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following examples showthe different parts of a tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric)Tire: The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the firstcharacter in the tire size meansa passenger vehicle tireengineered to standards set bythe U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is75 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radialply construction; the letter Dmeans diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tire

is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Light Truck (LT-Metric)Tire: The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letters LT as the first twocharacters in the tire size meana light truck tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.


Vehicle Care 10-49

For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem 3 of the light truck(LT-Metric) tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radialply construction; the letter Dmeans diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Load Range: Load Range.

(7) Service Description: Theservice description indicates theload index and speed rating of atire. If two numbers are given asin the example, 120/116, then

this represents the load index forsingle versus dual wheel usage(single/dual). The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load. Thisdoes not apply to GoodyearLT225/75R16 G949 RSA andGoodyear LT225/75R16 G933RSD commercial truck tires; seethe dual tire and single tiremaximum load and load rangeletter designations on the tiresidewall.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples of

optional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)


10-50 Vehicle Care

or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑52.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.


Vehicle Care 10-51

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See Tire

Pressure on page 9‑10 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑59.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑62.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by


10-52 Vehicle Care

68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire onpage 10‑76 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.

If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.


10-54 Vehicle Care

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑54.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate the


Vehicle Care 10-55

tires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. If the vehicle has DICbuttons, tire pressure levels can beviewed. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑24 and TireMessages on page 5‑36.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑52.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑57, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑58 and Tires onpage 10‑43.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.


10-56 Vehicle Care

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑60.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,

using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter's Q and Kbuttons at the same time forapproximately five seconds. Thehorn sounds twice to signal thereceiver is in relearn mode andthe TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.


Vehicle Care 10-57

If the vehicle does not haveRKE, press the DriverInformation Center (DIC) vehicleinformation button until thePRESS V TO RELEARN TIREPOSITIONS message displays.The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

If the vehicle does not have RKEor DIC buttons, press the tripodometer reset stem on theinstrument cluster until thePRESS V TO RELEARN TIREPOSITIONS message displays.The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button to

activate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.


10-58 Vehicle Care

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check the wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑59 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑64.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it in thetire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑52and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑54.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

Dual Tire RotationWhen the vehicle is new,or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,or wheel nut is replaced, check thewheel nut torque after 160,1 600, and 10 000 km (100,1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. Forproper wheel nut tighteninginformation, see “Removing the FlatTire and Installing the Spare Tire”under Tire Changing on page 10‑67.Also see “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

The outer tire on a dual wheel setupgenerally wears faster than theinner tire. Tires last longer and wearmore evenly if they are rotated. See

Tire Inspection on page 11‑3 andTire Rotation on page 10‑58. Alsosee Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle is operated with atire that is underinflated, the tirecan overheat. An overheated tirecan lose air suddenly or catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Properly inflate all tires,including the spare.

See Tires on page 10‑43 and TirePressure on page 10‑52 for moreinformation on proper tire inflation.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining.

Some commercial truck tires,including Goodyear LT225/75R16G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225/75R16 G933 RSD, may not havetreadwear indicators. If the tires donot have treadwear indicators,replace the tires when the treaddepth is down to 3.2 mm (1/8 in) forthe front tires, or 1.6 mm (1/16 in) forthe rear tires. See Tire Inspection


10-60 Vehicle Care

on page 10‑57 and Tire Rotation onpage 10‑58 for additionalinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced aftersix years, regardless of tread wear.The tire manufacturer date is thelast four digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01-52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. When

replacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑45 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four (sixfor dual rear wheels). Uniformtread depth on all tires will help


Vehicle Care 10-61

to maintain the performance ofthe vehicle. Braking andhandling performance may beadversely affected if all the tiresare not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires (six for dual rearwheels) should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10‑58 forinformation on proper tirerotation. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle (twofor single rear wheels, four fordual rear wheels).

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installedon the vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tireand wheel assembly with asimilar overall diameter as theroad tires and wheels, so it is

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

all right to drive on it. Thespare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle and will notaffect vehicle handling.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,


10-62 Vehicle Care

load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑53.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,

ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑60 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with


Vehicle Care 10-63

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a levelof performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of


10-64 Vehicle Care

performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smooth

road, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage tothe brakes, suspension, or othervehicle parts. The area damagedby the tire chains could cause youto lose control of the vehicle andyou or others may be injured in a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

crash. To help avoid damage tothe vehicle, drive slowly, readjust,or remove the device if it iscontacting the vehicle. Do notspin the vehicle's tires. Follow themanufacturer's instructions.

Notice: Use tire chains onlywhere legal and only when youmust. Use chains that are theproper size for the tires. Installthem on the tires of the rear axle.Do not use chains on the tires ofthe front axle. Tighten them astightly as possible with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chainmanufacturer's instructions.If you can hear the chainscontacting the vehicle, stop andretighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until itstops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chainson will damage the vehicle.

For Cutaway models with LT245/75R16, LT225/75R16 or LT215/85R16 size single or dual rear tires,use Low Profile Z-Chain or SAEClass S cables.

For Cargo or Passenger modelswith P245/70R17, LT225/75R16 orLT245/75R16 size tires, use LowProfile Z-Chain cables. SAE Class Schains are not recommended.

If the vehicle has dual rear tires, donot use individual tire chains. Usetire chains that fit across both dualtires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10‑43. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot off


10-66 Vehicle Care

the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,

if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-67

WARNING (Continued)

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1).

1. Wheel Block

2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

Equipment needed for a cargo vanor a passenger van is in thepassenger side rear corner of thevehicle.

Remove the retaining wing bolt andlift it off of the mounting bracket.

Equipment needed for a15-passenger seating arrangementis secured on the rear floor on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

Remove the retaining wing bolt andlift it out of the mounting bracket toaccess the equipment.


10-68 Vehicle Care

The tools you will be using include:

1. Jack

2. Hoist Handle

3. Extension(s)

4. Wheel Wrench

5. Jack Handle

The spare tire is mounted in the rearunderbody of the vehicle.

Use the hoist handle, extension(s),and the wheel wrench to remove theunderbody-mounted spare tire.

To lower the spare tire from thevehicle:

1. Spare Tire

2. Tire/Wheel Retainer

3. Hoist Cable

4. Hoist Assembly

5. Hoist Shaft

6. Hoist Handle and Extension(s)

7. Wheel Wrench

1. Assemble the wheel wrench (7)to the hoist handle and theextension(s) (6).

Insert the extension end throughthe hole in the rear bumper.

2. Be sure the extension endconnects to the hoist shaft. Thechiseled end of the extension isused to lower the spare tire.

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

If the spare tire does not lower tothe ground, the secondary latchis engaged causing the tire notto lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 10‑74.


Vehicle Care 10-69

4. When the tire has been lowered,pull it closer to reach the tireretainer and pull it up throughthe wheel opening.

For a vehicle that wascompleted from a cab andchassis, refer to the informationfrom the body supplier/installer.

The spare tire is a full-size tire,like the other tires on thevehicle.

5. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

If the vehicle has plastic wheel nutcaps, loosen them by turning thewheel wrench counterclockwise.The wheel nut caps are designed toremain with the center cap. Removethe center cap.

If the wheel has a smooth centerpiece, place the chisel end of thewheel wrench in the slot on thewheel and gently pry it out.

1. Jack

2. Hoist Handle

3. Extension(s)

4. Wheel Wrench

5. Jack Handle

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑65.

2. Loosen all the wheel nuts withthe wheel wrench. Do notremove them yet.

3. Assemble the jack and tools:

Front Flat: Assemble thejack (1) together with the jackhandle (5), one or twoextension(s) (3), and the wheelwrench (4).

Rear Flat: Assemble the jack (1)together with the jack handle (5),two extensions (3), and thewheel wrench (4).


10-70 Vehicle Care

Front Position

Front Position

Rear Position

Rear Alternative Position (DieselVehicles)

4. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.

The front position jacking point ison the frame. The rear positionjacking point is on the rear axle.

If the exhaust system interfereswith the jack location in the rearaxle, such as in Diesel vehicles,place the jack (1) on the rearaxle between the axle housingand the shock absorber bracketin order to avoid anyinterference with the exhaustpipe (2).

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack you couldbe badly injured or killed. Neverget under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.


Vehicle Care 10-71

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to fit.

6. Remove all the wheel nuts.

7. Take the flat tire off of themounting surface.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.


10-72 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9. Put the wheel nuts back on withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel. Tighten eachwheel nut by hand until thewheel is held against the hub.

10. Turn the jack handlecounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are not tight canwork loose. If all the nuts on awheel come off, the wheel cancome off the vehicle, causing acrash. All wheel nuts must beproperly tightened. Follow therules in this section to be surethey are.

{ WARNING

If wheel studs are damaged, theycan break. If all the studs on awheel broke, the wheel couldcome off and cause a crash.If any stud is damaged becauseof a loose-running wheel, it couldbe that all of the studs are

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

damaged. To be sure, replace allstuds on the wheel. If the studholes in a wheel have becomelarger, the wheel could collapse inoperation. Replace any wheel ifits stud holes have become largeror distorted in any way. Inspecthubs and hub‐piloted wheels fordamage. Because of looserunning wheels, piloting paddamage may occur and requirereplacement of the entire hub, forproper centering of the wheels.When replacing studs, hubs,wheel nuts or wheels, be sure touse GM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose or

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-73

WARNING (Continued)

come off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

11. Use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts firmly. Turn thewheel wrench clockwise and ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

12. Put the wheel cover or thecenter cap and plastic wheelnut caps back on. Remove anywheel blocks.

Have a technician check thewheel nut tightness of allwheels with a torque wrenchafter the first 160 km (100 mi)and then 1 600 km (1,000 mi)after that. Repeat this servicewhenever a tire is removed orserviced. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 formore information.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

1. Put the tire on the ground at therear of the vehicle with the valvestem pointed down.


10-74 Vehicle Care

2. Pull the retaining bar through thecenter of the wheel, making sureit is properly attached.

3. Pull the wheel toward the rear ofthe vehicle, keeping the cabletight.

4. Put the chisel end of the hoistextension on an angle throughthe hole in the rear door frame,above the bumper.

5. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle.Continue turning the wheelwrench until the tire is secureand the cable is tight. The sparetire hoist cannot beovertightened.

6. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (1), and thentry to turn (2) the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wheel wrench totighten the cable.

Two clicks mean the tire is up allthe way.

7. Return the jacking equipment tothe proper location. Secure theitems and replace the jack cover.

Secondary Latch SystemThis vehicle has anunderbody-mounted tire hoistassembly equipped with asecondary latch system. It isdesigned to stop the spare tire fromsuddenly falling off the vehicle if thecable holding the spare tire isdamaged. For the secondary latchto work, the tire must be stowedwith the valve stem pointing down.

See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools” under Tire Changing onpage 10‑67 for instructions onstoring the spare tire correctly.

{ WARNING

Before beginning this procedureread all the instructions. Failure toread and follow the instructionscould damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could gethurt. Read and follow theinstructions listed next.


Vehicle Care 10-75

To release the spare tire from thesecondary latch:

{ WARNING

Someone standing too closeduring the procedure could beinjured by the jack. If the sparetire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one isbehind you or on either side ofyou as you pull the jack out fromunder the spare.

1. Check under the vehicle to see ifthe cable end is visible.

If the cable is not visible, startthis procedure at Step 6.

2. Turn the hoist extensioncounterclockwise untilapproximately 15 cm (6 in) ofcable is exposed.

3. Attach the jack handle/jackhandle extension and wheelwrench to the jack.

4. Place the jack under the vehicle,ahead of the rear bumper.Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of thespare tire and turn the handleclockwise to raise the jack until itlifts the secondary latch spring.

5. Keep raising the jack until thespare tire stops moving upwardand is held firmly in place. Thislets you know that the secondarylatch has released. The sparetire is now balancing on the jack.


10-76 Vehicle Care

6. Lower the jack by turning thewheel wrench counterclockwise.Keep lowering the jack until thespare tire slides off the jack or ishanging by the cable.

7. Disconnect the jack handle fromthe jack and carefully removethe jack. Use one hand to pushagainst the spare while firmlypulling the jack out from underthe spare tire with theother hand.

If the spare tire is hanging fromthe cable, assembly the wheelwrench onto the hoist extensionand insert the chisel end of thehoist extension into the hoistshaft hole above the bumper.Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare the rest of the way.

8. Tilt the retainer at the end of thecable and pull it through thewheel opening. Pull the tire outfrom under the vehicle.

Notice: If you drive away beforethe spare tire or secondary latchsystem cable has beenreinstalled, you could damage thevehicle. Always reinstall thiscable before driving the vehicle.

9. If the cable is hanging under thevehicle, turn the wheel wrench inthe hoist shaft hole in thebumper clockwise to raise thecable back up.

Have the hoist assembly inspectedas soon as you can. You will not beable to store a spare or flat tireusing the hoist assembly until it hasbeen repaired or replaced.

To continue changing the flat tire,return to Step 4 of “Storing a Flat orSpare Tire and Tools” under TireChanging on page 10‑67.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure on

page 10‑52 and Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10. For instructions onhow to remove, install, or store aspare tire, see Tire Changing onpage 10‑67.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare is correctlyinflated. The spare tire is made toperform well at speeds up to112 km/h (70 mph) at therecommended inflation pressure, soyou can finish your trip.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced back onto thevehicle, as soon as possible, so thespare tire will be available in case itis needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep the spare tire and its wheeltogether.


Vehicle Care 10-77

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑26.

If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start your

vehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are not


10-78 Vehicle Care

needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations of the othervehicle.

On your van, use the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (−) terminal.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go toan unpainted metal part or to aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. On yourvan, use the unpainted radioantenna bracket as a remotenegative (−) terminal.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.


Vehicle Care 10-79

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Do not let theother end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal ofthe good battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery. On your van, use theunpainted radio antenna bracketas a remote negative (−)terminal.

8. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal location onthe vehicle with the dead battery.On your van, use the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (−) terminal.

Notice: Your vehicle uses theunpainted radio antenna bracketas a remote negative (−) terminal.Move the antenna coax cable outof the way before clamping thenegative jumper cable to the fixedantenna bracket. Avoid touchingthe negative cable clamp to theair conditioning line. Failure to do


10-80 Vehicle Care

either of these could damageyour vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

9. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run the enginefor a while.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: Incorrectly towing adisabled vehicle may causedamage. The damage would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier or a wheel lift tow truck.If a wheel lift tow truck is used, thedrive wheels cannot contact theroad while the vehicle is beingtowed. A wheel dolly must be usedto lift all drive wheels off the ground.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.


Vehicle Care 10-81

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with all four wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff the ground.

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drivevehicle with all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, will

damage drivetrain components.Do not tow an all-wheel-drivevehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground.

Dolly Towing

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround) – Two-Wheel-DriveVehicles

Use the following procedure to towthe vehicle from the rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.


10-82 Vehicle Care

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 9‑31for more information.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

If the tow vehicle will not bestarted or driven for six weeks ormore, remove the battery cablefrom the negative terminal (post)of the battery to prevent thebattery from draining whiletowing.

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround) – All-Wheel-DriveVehicles

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff the ground.

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drivevehicle with all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components.Do not tow an all-wheel-drivevehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground.


Vehicle Care 10-83

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not usepetroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents asthey can damage the vehicle'spaint, metal, or plastic parts.If damage occurs, it would not becovered by the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correct

product usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid usinghigh-pressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed and

repaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishes


10-84 Vehicle Care

that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to a high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses andemblems. Follow instructions under"Washing the Vehicle" in thissection.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstripsonce a year. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with a

clean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,


Vehicle Care 10-85

calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect the front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,

leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visuallycheck constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion

material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners to

remain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per

3.78 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.


Vehicle Care 10-87

Notice: Cleaning the windshieldwith water during the first three tosix months of ownership willreduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,

gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.


10-88 Vehicle Care

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

Notice: Do not attach a devicewith a suction cup to the display.This may cause damage andwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-89

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for thevehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


10-90 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended FluidsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15

General InformationThis maintenance section applies tovehicles with a gasoline engine. Fordiesel engine vehicles, see themaintenance schedule section inthe Duramax diesel supplement.

Your vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesy

transportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.The Additional RequiredServices - Normal are forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑42.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional RequiredServices - Severe are for vehiclesthat are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑3.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑6.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑52.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑57.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle service

for more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑8.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑58.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑6 and Engine OilLife System on page 10‑8.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑16.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑83. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑30.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑52.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑57.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,



or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑83.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑14.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑83.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑29.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑29.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑30.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑30.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

(1) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

(2) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(3) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

(6) Inspect for fraying, excessivecracking, or damage; replace,if needed.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

(1) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

(2) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(3) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(4) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

(5) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

(5) Inspect for fraying, excessivecracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Vehicles with Dual Wheels:

Check dual wheel nut torque at160 km/100 mi, 1 600 km/1,000 mi and 9 700 km/6,000 mi.

. Severe Commercial UseVehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommendedthat your dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehicle best.Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti-point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the services andconditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.



Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break-down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.



Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through the

rubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑86 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑83.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.



Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsThis maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see themaintenance schedule section in the Duramax diesel supplement.

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑6.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, inCanada 89021320).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Parking Brake Cable Guides Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Front Wheel Bearings Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category GC orGC-LB (GM Part No. 1051344, in Canada 993037).

Front and Rear Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Transfer Case DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).



Maintenance Replacement PartsIf the vehicle has the Duramax diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15950115 A3097C

Engine Oil Filter

4.3L V6 25010792 PF47

4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs

4.3L V6 12568387 41-101

4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 12621258 41-110

Wiper Blades – 56.0 cm (22 in) 25949887 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-5

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the rear edge of thepassenger side front door, has thefollowing information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsIf the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.

The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System without Rear Heat

4.3L V6 9.5 L 10.0 qt

4.8L V8, 5.3L V8 11.8 L 12.4 qt

6.0L V8 13.1 L 13.8 qt

Cooling System with Rear Heat

4.3L V6 12.3 L 13.0 qt

4.8L V8, 5.3L V8 14.6 L 15.4 qt

6.0L V8 16.1 L 17.0 qt


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Engine Oil with Filter

4.3L V6 4.3 L 4.5 qt

4.8L V8, 5.3L V8, 6.0L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Cutaway (Optional Tank)* 215.7 L 57.0 gal

Cutaway (Standard Tank) 124.9 L 33.0 gal

Passenger and Cargo 117.3 L 31.0 gal

* 4 039 mm (159 inch) wheelbase or 4 496 mm (177 inch) wheelbase only

Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)

4-SPD 4L60-E 4.7 L 5.0 qt

6-SPD 6L90 6.0 L 6.3 qt

Transfer Case Fluid 1.4 L 1.5 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 ft lb

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

4.3L V6 X Automatic 1.52 mm (0.060 in)

4.8L V8 A Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

5.3L V8 4 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

6.0L V8 G Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)


Technical Data 12-5

Engine Drive Belt Routing

V6 Engines

V8 Engines



12-6 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . 13-13OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-14Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-14

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofilling out a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-800-462-8583 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, MailCode: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance

Center. Any TTY user cancommunicate with GMC bydialing: 1-800-462-8583. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.gmc.com

The GMC online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with GMC and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,required alerts, OnStar onboardvehicle diagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12‑1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.gmc.com to register yourvehicle.



GMC Owner Centre (Canada)gmcowner.ca

Take a trip to the GMC OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find the GMC-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle



. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the

claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is also given whenthe vehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed during the5 years/(160 000 km) 100,000 miPowertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.



. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometres from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,

the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultant

of your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),



extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

The Courtesy Transportationprogram is no longer available forcutaway vehicles.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportation

options. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel

expenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.



It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper

equipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice to

maintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair center



with GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.

If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.



If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑22.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may be

obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.



RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, MailCode: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacy

Vehicle Data RecordingThis vehicle may be equipped with amodule that records data in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as when an air bag deploys orthe vehicle hits a road obstacle.This data could help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. Some data may berelated to the vehicle dynamics andsafety systems operation. The datamay show:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. If and how far the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.



. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

This data could provide anunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.Data could be recorded by thevehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded under normal drivingconditions and no personal data arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine recorded data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read recorded data, specialequipment is required, and accessto the vehicle or the module isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the module.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,

if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation; aboutcollisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the

OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the navigation manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or record



personal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

The vehicle will have one of thesesets of buttons.

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PressQ, or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press X or= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.


14-2 OnStar

. Get driving directions. Requiresthe available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

Press the OnStar Emergencybutton,] or>, to get a priorityconnection to an EmergencyAdvisor available 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

Press] or> to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations before firstresponders arrive.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped with theseservices. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if it is

equipped with automatic door locks,and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PressQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.The OnStar mapping database iscontinuously updated. For coveragemaps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.),www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. PressX or=. Systemresponds: “OnStar ready,” then atone. Say “Cancel route.”System responds: “Do you wantto cancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. PressX or=. Systemresponds: “OnStar ready,” thena tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with addressand the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations fromMapQuest.com to their Turn-by-TurnNavigation or screen-basednavigation system. When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.

Destination Download: PressQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, press the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.),www.onstar.ca (Canada).


14-4 OnStar

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled from a cell phone throughthe OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.),www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Hands-Free Calling

1. Press X or= . Systemresponds: “OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press X or= . Systemresponds “OnStar Ready,”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Call.” System responds“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Press X or= . System responds:“Call ended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press X or= and say “Minutes”then “Verify” to check how manyminutes remain and theirexpiration date.


OnStar 14-5

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select iPhone,Android and Blackberry devices tocheck vehicle fuel level, oil life,or tire pressure; to start the vehicle(if equipped) or unlock it; or toconnect to an OnStar Advisor. ForOnStar RemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.), www.onstar.ca (Canada).

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, pressQ, and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. In the U.S. see www.onstar.com

(U.S.) or call 1.888.4.ONSTAR.(1.888.466.7827).

. In Canada see www.onstar.ca(Canada) or call1.888.4.ONSTAR.(1.888.466.7827).

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

.OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to be


14-6 OnStar

available and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of the

vehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑15 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca(Canada)

The website provides access toaccount information, allowsmanagement of the OnStarsubscription, and viewing of videosof each service. Get subscriptionplan pricing and sign up for OnStarVehicle Diagnostics. Click on the“My Account” tab on the homepage. The website navigation andservices provided may vary bycountry.


OnStar 14-7

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in French or Spanish.PressQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors can speak French orSpanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.


14-8 OnStar

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑57. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada).Privacy-sensitive users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-18

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-26, 9-30AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Audio SystemFixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .9-22, 9-26Transmission Fluid . . . .10-9, 10-11

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-30Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-35

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 10-31, 10-32License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-36Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-17CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-30

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-40

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-47, 3-49, 3-52Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9


INDEX i-3

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-5

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-26, 9-30

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-19Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-6If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Dual TireRotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59


i-4 INDEX

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Floor Console Fuse Block . . 10-41Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Cooling System Messages . . .5-31Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Engine (cont'd)Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-22Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

Enhanced TechnologyGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4

Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89FluidAutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . .10-9, 10-11

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Front Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-42Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-23


INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont'd)Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Requirements, California . . . . .9-43System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-76FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Floor Console Fuse Block . . 10-41Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glass, EnhancedTechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-24High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-6Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

IIdle SystemFast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii


i-6 INDEX

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-33Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-45LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Lamps, Bulb Replacement . . . . 10-33Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7LightingEntry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

LightsAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-23Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-14Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Lights (cont'd)Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-23Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40


INDEX i-7

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-31Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Object Detection System . . . . .5-33Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-34Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Messages (cont'd)Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

MirrorsConvex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-28

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-8Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-33Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2


i-8 INDEX

Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2, 7-4

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-30

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-21Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-26Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-14

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-14Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-5Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-38Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordingVehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15


INDEX i-9

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-32Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-15

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-5Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-15Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-14

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-2Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-74Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . 3-47, 3-49, 3-52

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1


i-10 INDEX

Service (cont'd)Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-29Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Storage AreasFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16SwitchesAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

TTaillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Tires (cont'd)Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-54Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-53Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Secondary Latch System . . . 10-74Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21


INDEX i-11

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-47Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-47Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-80Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

TrailerTow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22, 9-26Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . .10-9, 10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-37Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-37Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 13-13Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-39Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Enhanced TechnologyGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-16


i-12 INDEX

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-30

2013 gmc savana owner manual m€¦ · gmc savana owner manual - 2013 - 2nd edition - 9/25/12 black...

Documents